TekTronix CSA8000 Series User Manual

User Manual
CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer

TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope
071-0433-02
This document applies to firmware version 1.00

and above.
www.tektronix.com
Copyright Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and
are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If this product proves defective during its
warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, will either repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor,
or provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
This warranty applies only to products returned to the designated Tektronix depot or the Tektronix authorized
representative from which the product was originally purchased. For products returned to other locations,
Customer will be assessed an applicable service charge. The preceding limitation shall not apply within the
European Economic Area, where products may be returned for warranty service to the nearest designated service
depot regardless of the place of purchase.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must provide the applicable office of Tektronix or its
authorized representative with notice of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable
arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the
defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix or its representative, with shipping charges
prepaid. Tektronix or its representative shall pay for the return of the product to Customer. Customer shall be
responsible for paying any associated taxes or duties.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty:
a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or
service the product;
b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment;
c) to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies or consumables;
d) to repair a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such
modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product; or
e) to repair damage or malfunction resulting from failure to perform user maintenance and cleaning at the
frequency and as prescribed in the user manual (if applicable).
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF
ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX
RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS
VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xiii
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Manuals and Online Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting Tektronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiii
xiv
xv
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampling Modules Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
13
13
13
Check the Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
17
Check the Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Install the Sampling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect the Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering Off the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create an Emergency Startup Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back Up User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating System Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows 98 Reinstall Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
18
111
112
114
114
115
115
115
115
116
116
117
Incoming Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
Assemble Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform the Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform the Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
120
121
123
132
Accessories and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
135
136
137
Documentation Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Overview Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
23
Functional Model Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Product Description
Operational Maps
CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual
Table of Contents
Process Overview Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
User Interface Map Complete Control and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features . . . . .
Display Map Single Graticule View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Map Multiple Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
27
28
29
210
211
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquiring Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
33
Signal Connection and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Versatile Autoset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampling Modules Selection and Signal Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling Concerns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling, Offset, and Positioning Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger and Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........................................................
Selected Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Control Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Set Up the Signal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Autoset the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Reset the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Conditioning Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autoset Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Scale vs. Record Length vs. Sample Interval vs.
Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent vs. Shared Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Acquisition Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop After Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrameScanTM Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquisition Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquisition Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Aliasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Set Acquisition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Start and Stop Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
311
312
312
312
313
313
316
Reference
ii
317
319
319
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
321
321
322
322
323
325
Table of Contents
Acquisition Control Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquisition Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampling Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquisition Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FrameScan Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakthrough time base stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible set-up support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification and analysis of pattern-dependent failures. . . . . . . . . . . .
Improved noise resolution on low-power communication signals. . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determine Start Bit and Scan Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How FrameScan Mode Acquires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Acquire in FrameScan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Catch a Bit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
326
326
327
327
328
329
329
329
329
329
329
329
330
330
330
330
332
335
Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
Edge Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triggering is Global. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge-Trigger Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Source and ESD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Source Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probe-to-Trigger Source Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Frequency Triggering and Metastability Reject. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Holdoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usable Holdoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requested vs Actual Holdoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
337
337
337
337
337
338
338
339
339
341
341
341
342
342
343
344
345
Displaying Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347
Using the Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Display Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Time base Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Access to Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preview Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations on Selected Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graticules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347
349
349
349
349
349
349
349
350
350
350
351
351
iii
Table of Contents
iv
Operations on the Selected Time Base View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Waveform Operations that Cross Time Base Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Controls vs. Acquisition Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mag1 and Mag2 are Magnifying Timebases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mouse and Touchscreen Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Display Waveforms in the Main Time Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Display Waveforms in a Mag View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal and Persistence Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Set Display Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Customize the Graticule and Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
351
352
352
353
353
353
355
357
358
358
359
359
359
360
360
361
362
Measuring Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
Taking Automatic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annotate Waveforms On Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Databases as Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Take Eye-Pattern and Optical Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characterize Measurements Independently. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
See Statistics on Measurement Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Databases as Sources Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Tracking Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Levels Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Take Automatic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Localize a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Cursor Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Sources Can I Measure? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursors are Display-Limited. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursors Default to the Selected Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursors Can Treat Sources Independently. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Units Depend on Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Take a Cursor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Set the Cursor Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366
366
366
366
366
367
367
367
367
367
367
368
368
368
368
368
369
370
371
372
375
377
377
377
378
378
378
378
378
379
379
380
381
382
Table of Contents
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Compensate the Instrument and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Perform Dark-Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations . . . . . .
383
383
383
384
387
Creating Math Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
Defining Math Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Scalars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Create. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Dependencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Base Dependencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expression Syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Define a
Math Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations on Math Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use Math Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
390
390
390
390
390
391
391
391
392
392
392
393
395
395
395
396
396
396
397
Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3101
Saving and Recalling Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commenting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Keyboarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Settings are Retained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retaining Current Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding Setup/Waveform Mismatches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding Setup and Sampling Module Mismatches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Save Your Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Recall Your Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commenting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Keyboarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Save Your Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Recall Your Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Clear References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Waveforms and Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3101
3101
3101
3102
3102
3102
3102
3102
3102
3102
3103
3103
3106
3108
3108
3108
3108
3108
3108
3109
3112
3115
3116
3116
Table of Contents
vi
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Export Your Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Export Your Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use an Exported Waveform (or Histogram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3116
3116
3117
3117
3120
3121
Using Masks, Histograms, and Waveform Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3123
Mask Testing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Mask Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask-Specific Autoset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask Standards and Masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask Counts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Mask Test a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Edit a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counting Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Create a New Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Histogram Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Any Waveform or database as Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Histogram Counting Stays On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Histogram Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Take a Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Histogram Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Waveform Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Special? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whats Excluded? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References as sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More than two waveform databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpolation or vector displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Set Up a Waveform Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Customize the Database Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3123
3123
3123
3123
3124
3124
3124
3124
3125
3125
3127
3130
3132
3133
3134
3134
3134
3134
3134
3135
3135
3135
3135
3135
3135
3136
3138
3139
3139
3139
3139
3139
3139
3140
3140
3140
3140
3141
3143
Accessing Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3145
Whats Available? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys to Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3145
3145
3145
3146
Cleaning the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3153
Table of Contents
Exterior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Panel Display Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3153
3153
Appendices
Appendix A: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A9
Appendix B: Automatic Measurements Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B1
Amplitude Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eye Pattern and Optical Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Levels Used in Taking Amplitude, Timing, and Area Measurements . . . . . . . . .
Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B1
B2
B3
B5
B6
B7
Appendix C: Insert Sampling Module User Manuals Here . . . . . . . .
C1
Glossary
Index
vii
Table of Contents
List of Tables
viii
Table 11: Additional accessory connection information . . . . . . . . . .

Table 12: Line fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13: Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 14: Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
135
136
Table 31: Application-based triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 32: Defining and displaying waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 33: Operations performed based on the selected waveform .
Table 34: Equivalent mouse and touchscreen operations . . . . . . . . .
Table 35: Customizable display attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 36: Cursor functions (types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 37: Cursor units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 38: Math expressions and the math waveforms produced . . .
Table 39: Standard masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 310: Histogram statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
350
351
354
359
377
380
391
3124
3138
Table A1: System Signal acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A2: System Timebase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A3: System Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A4: System Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A5: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Power consumption
and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A6: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A7: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A8: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A9: Certifications and compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1
A2
A3
A6
A7
A7
A8
A8
A9
Table B1: Supported amplitude measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B2: Supported area measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B3: Supported eye-pattern/optical measurements . . . . . . . . .
Table B4: Supported timing measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B1
B2
B3
B5
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 11: Compartments for sampling modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12: Maximum inputs in three configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13: Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel . . . . . .
Figure 14: Line fuse and power cord connector locations,
rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15: On/Standby switch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16: Compensation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17: Hookup for electrical functional tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18: Channel button location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19: Channel button location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 110: Optical channel verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 111: Hookup for the time base tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 112: Channel button location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 113: Main time base verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 114: Mag time base verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 31: Acquisition and display controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32: Setting vertical scale and position of input channels . . . .
Figure 33: Varying offset positions vertical acquisition window
on waveform amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 34: Horizontal acquisition window definition . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35: Common trigger, record length, and acquisition rate
for all channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36: Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 37: Channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 38: Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing . . . . . . . . .
Figure 39: The waveform record and its defining parameters . . . . .
Figure 310: How FrameScan acquisition works (scanning
on a 127bit PRBS shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 311: Slope and level define the trigger event . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 312: Triggered versus untriggered displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 313: Trigger inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 314: Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers . . . . . . . .
Figure 315: Trigger to End Of Record Time (EORT) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 316: Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
110
111
112
113
122
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
34
314
316
317
319
322
326
327
328
331
338
339
340
343
344
348
ix
Table of Contents
Figure 317: Horizontal position includes time to

Horizontal Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 318: Graticule, cursor and automatic measurements . . . . . .
Figure 319: Measurement annotations on a waveform . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 320: High/Low tracking methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 321: Reference-level calculation methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 322: Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 323: Components determining Time cursor readout values .
Figure 324: Functional transformation of an acquired waveform . .
Figure 325: Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 326: Print dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 327: Creating a user mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 328: Adding a new vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 329: Vertical histogram view and statistics on data . . . . . . . .
Figure 330: Normal vector view of a waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 331: Waveform database view of a waveform . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 332: Waveform database data using the Intensity
display option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3144
Figure B1: Levels used to determine measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure B2: Eye-diagram and optical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B6
B7
353
365
366
369
371
378
380
389
3117
3120
3126
3126
3134
3142
3142
General Safety Summary

Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
While using this product, you may need to access other parts of the system. Read
the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions
related to operating the system.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test
leads while they are connected to a voltage source.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that
exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Wear Eye Protection. Wear eye protection if exposure to high-intensity rays or
laser radiation exists.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
xi
General Safety Summary
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manuals installation instructions for

details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in

damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:

DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
CAUTION
Refer to Manual
Rackmount Installations
WARNING
High Voltage
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
This product may be rackmounted by using the appropriate Tektronix rackmount

kit and following its instructions. If rackmounting, you must observe the
following warnings:
WARNING. To prevent the rackmounted instrument from tipping forward onto the
operator, install the instrument so that the operator will be able to access all of
its rear devices without pushing down on the instrument.
Verify that the rack does not become unstable with the instrument fully extended.
Do not leave the instrument extended when finished accessing the rear panel.
xii
Preface
This is the user manual for the instrument. It covers the following information:
H
Describes the capabilities of the instrument, how to install it and reinstall its
software
Explains how to operate the instrument: how to control acquisition of,

processing of, and input/output of information
Lists the specifications and accessories of the instrument
About This Manual

This manual is composed of the following chapters:
H
Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your instrument and
provides an incoming inspection procedure.
Operating Basics uses maps to describe the various interfaces for controlling
the instrument, including the front panel and the software user interface.
These maps provide overviews of the product and its functions from several
viewpoints.
Reference comprises an encyclopedia of topics (see Overview on page 31)

that describe the instrument interface and features, and that give background
and basic information on how to use them. (The online help onboard the
instrument application describes the interface, features, and their usage in
more detail; detailed descriptions of all programming commands are found
in the CSA8000 & TDS8000 Programmer Online Guide manual.)
Appendices provides additional information including the specifications and

automatic measurement definitions.
Related Manuals and Online Documents

This manual is part of a document set of standard-accessory manuals and online
documentation; this manual mainly focuses on installation and background
needed to use the product features. See the following list for other documents
xiii
Preface
supporting instrument operation and service. (Manual part numbers are listed in
Table 13 on page 135.)
Manual name
Description
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Online Help
An online help system, integrated with the User Interface application that ships with this
product.
CSA8000 & TDS8000 References
A quick reference to major features of the instrument and how they operate.
80E01, 80E02, 80E03 & 80E04 Electrical

Sampling Module User Manual 1
The user manual for the electrical sampling modules. Included as a standard accessory
if you ordered electrical sampling modules with this instrument. Shipped in the
sampling module package, not the main instrument package.
80C00 Optical Sampling Module User

Manual 1
The user manual for the optical sampling modules. Included as a standard accessory if
you ordered optical sampling modules with this instrument. Shipped in the sampling
module package, not the main instrument package.
80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier

Module User Manual 1
The user manual for the 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module. Included
as a standard accessory if you ordered this module with this instrument. Shipped in the
module package, not the main instrument package.
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Programmer Online

Guide
An alphabetical listing of the programming commands and other information related to

controlling the instrument over the GPIB.
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Service Manual
Describes how to service the instrument to the module level. This optional manual must
be ordered separately.
You can insert the module user manuals in Appendix C, which this manual provides for keeping these manuals together.
For more information on how the product documentation relates to the

instrument operating interfaces and features, see Documentation Map on
page 22.
Conventions
Terminology: This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and
horizontal acquisition window throughout this section and elsewhere. These
terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the acquisition window, which
defines the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires.
The terms do not refer to any operating system windows that you might display
on screen.
xiv
Preface
Contacting Tektronix
Phone
1-800-833-9200*
Address
Tektronix, Inc.
Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
Web site
www.tektronix.com
Sales support
1-800-833-9200, select option 1*
Service support
1-800-833-9200, select option 2*
Technical support
Email: [email protected]
1-800-833-9200, select option 3*
1-503-627-2400
6:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.
xv
Preface
xvi
Product Description
This chapter describes your instrument, which is either the CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer or the TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope, and
its options. Following this description are four sections:
H
Check the Package Contents, on page 15, shows you how to verify that you
have received all of the parts of your instrument.
Installation, on page 17, shows you how to configure and install the
instrument, as well as how to reinstall the system software included with the
product.
Incoming Inspection, on page 119, provides a procedure for verifying basic

operation and functionality.
Options and Accessories, on page 135, lists the instrument options

available and the standard and optional accessories for this product.
Models
This manual supports two very similar instruments:
H
The CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer.
The TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope.
Differences between the two instruments will be called out when necessary;
otherwise, the material applies to both instruments. The word instrument refers
to either product.
Key Features
The instrument is a high-speed, precision sampling system that finds use in:
H
high-performance semiconductor/computer applications, such as semiconductor testing, TDR characterization of circuit boards, IC packages and
cables, and high-speed serial digital data communications.
high-performance communications applications, such as design evaluation

and manufacturing test of datacom and telecom components, transceiver
subassemblies, and transmission systems.
The instrument includes a user interface that runs on the Microsoft Windows 98
operating system as a windowed application. You operate the instrument using
11
Product Description
front-panel controls with the mouse and keyboard or with the touch screen. Key
features include:
12
industry-leading waveform acquisition rate, with Sample, Envelope, and

Average acquisition modes.
support for up to six sampling modules for a maximum configuration of ten

inputs. (Up to eight inputs can be active at a time. See Maximum Configuration on page 110).
full programmability, with an extensive GPIB-command set and a messagebased interface.
true differential TDR, with fast step (35 psec reflected risetime) when used
with a TDR-capable sampling module.
negligible long-term jitter degradation (<0.1 ppm), which substantially

improves the ability to view signals that are far delayed from the trigger
point without distortion.
industry-leading trigger bandwidth (12+ GHz) when using the built-in-prescaler.
support of both telecom (SONET and SDH) and datacom (Fibre Channel and
Gigabit Ethernet) optical communication standards.
powerful built-in measurement capability, including histograms, mask

testing, and automatic measurements. Automatic measurements include
eye/communications measurements, such as Q factor, extinction ratio, and
optical power and general-purpose measurements, such as jitter and noise.
DC to 50 GHz optical bandwidth; DC to 50 GHz electrical bandwidth, with

up to 12.5 GHz triggering.
FrameScan acquisition for isolating data-dependent failures during conformance/performance testing and for examining very low-level repetitive
signals.
support for optical conformance testing of SONET/SDH signals from

622 Mbps to 10.66 Gbps and for Fibre Channel 1063 and Gigabit Ethernet
signals.
a large 10-inch color display that supports color grading of waveform data to
show sample density.
an intuitive UI (User Interface), with built-in online help displayable on

screen.
Product Description
Product Software
The instrument includes the following software:
H
Windows 98 comes preinstalled on the instrument. Windows 98 is the

operating system on which the user-interface application of this instrument
runs. The OS Rebuild CD (063-3491-XX) includes the software needed to
rebuild the instrument operating system if that becomes necessary.
The User Interface (UI) Application (product software) comes preinstalled on

the instrument. This UI application complements the hardware controls of
the front panel, allowing complete set up of all instrument features. The
Product Software CD (063-3492-XX) includes the UI Application for use if
reinstalling the product software becomes necessary. See Software Installation on page 115.
Occasionally new versions of the software may become available at our web site.
See Contacting Tektronix on page xv in Preface.
Firmware Upgrade
Tektronix may offer firmware upgrade kits for the instrument. Contact your
Tektronix service representative for more information (see Contacting Tektronix
on page xv).
Sampling Modules Supported

This product can use the following optical and electrical sampling modules listed
below. These modules, which plug into the instrument, are more fully described
in their respective user manuals. These manuals were shipped with those
sampling modules that were ordered with this product.
The sampling modules listed here were available at the time this manual was
published; see your Tektronix product catalog for current offerings.
Optical Sampling Modules.
H
80C01 622/2488/9953 Mbps/20 GHz optical module

Clock Recovery (622/2488 Mbps) added with option CR.
80C02 9.953 Gbps/20/30 GHz optical module

Clock Recovery (9.953 Gbps) added with option CR.
80C03 1063/1250/2488 Mbps optical module

Clock Recovery added with option CR.
13
Product Description
80C04 10 Gb/s optical module with FEC support

Option CR1 adds 9.953 Gb/s clock recovery.
Option CR2 adds 9.953 and 10.66 Gb/s clock recovery.
80C05 40/30/20 GHz and OC-192 optical module
80C06 50 GHz optical module for 40 Gb/s RZ telecom.
Electrical Sampling Modules.

H
80E01 A single-channel, 50 GHz sampling module
80E02 A dual-channel, 12.5 GHz, 50 W, sampling module with low noise
80E03 A dual-channel, 20 GHz sampling module. This model provides the

same features as 80E04, but without the TDR step generator.
80E04 A dual-channel, 20 GHz TDR sampling module. The TDR step

generator provides 35 ps reflected step risetime. Voltage polarity can be
reversed on either step to provide true differential TDR.
Other Modules.
H
14
80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module A single-channel

module providing 8-14 GHz AC coupled 50 W limiting preamplification. It
increases the sensitivity of the prescale trigger input of the 8000 Series
instruments to v200 mVpk-pk.
Check the Package Contents

Verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument. You should
verify that you have:
H
the main instrument.
all the standard accessories for the main instrument.
NOTE. Standard accessories are listed in Table 13 on page 135.

H
the correct power cords for your geographical area.
the OS Rebuild CDs (063-3491-XX) and Product Software CD

(063-3492-XX) that include an installation copy of the software installed on
the instrument and all files needed to rebuild your instrument operating
system if necessary. Store the CDs in a safe location where you can easily
retrieve them for maintenance purposes.
NOTE. Keep the certificate of authenticity that accompanies the product-software

CD.
H
the correct electrical and optical sampling modules (shipped separately if

ordered). (The sampling modules available for order for use with this
instrument are listed on page 13.)
NOTE. Any electrical and optical sampling modules ordered are shipped
separately. The sampling modules available for order for use with this instrument are listed on page 13. (Also, any optional accessories ordered are shipped
separately. See Table 14 on page 136 for a list of optional accessories.)
Remember to fill out and send in the customer registration card. The registration
card is packaged in an envelope in the shipping package.
15
Installation
16
Installation
NOTE. Before beginning installation for the first time, be sure to see Check the
Package Contents, on page 15. Then return to this installation section.
This section covers installation of the instrument, addressing the following
topics:
H
Check the Environment Requirements on page 17
Install the Sampling Modules on page 18
Connect the Peripherals on page 111
Power On the Instrument on page 112
Powering Off the Instrument on page 114
Create an Emergency Startup Disk on page 114
Back Up User Files on page 115
The basic operating software is already installed on the hard disk. If reinstallation of software becomes needed, see the following topic:
H
Software Installation on page 115
CAUTION. Be sure to create your emergency startup disk as described on

page 114. You will need that disk if you ever need to reinstall Windows 98 from
the instrument hard drive.
Check the Environmental Requirements

Read this section before attempting any installation procedures. This section
describes site considerations, power requirements, and ground connections for
your instrument.
Site Considerations
The instrument is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal

position (on the bottom feet). For proper cooling, at least two inches (5.1 cm) of
clearance is recommended on the rear and sides of the instrument.
You can also operate the instrument while it rests stood up on its rear feet. If you
operate the instrument while it is resting on the rear feet, make sure that you
17
Installation
properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the instrument to avoid
damaging them.
CAUTION. Keep the bottom of the instrument clear of obstructions to ensure
proper cooling.
Operating Requirements
Rackmount Requirements
Specifications in Appendix A list the operating requirements for the instrument.

Power source and temperature, humidity, and altitude are listed.
If this instrument is rackmounted, see the TDS8000 & CSA8000 Rackmount
Instructions for additional site considerations or operating requirements. This
document ships with the Option 1 R (rackmount kit).
Install the Sampling Modules

CAUTION. Do not install or remove any sampling modules while the instrument is
powered on.
Always power the instrument down before attempting to remove or insert any
sampling module.
WARNING. Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage. Always

observe static-safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module
user manual.
Check Your Sampling

Module Manual(s)
18
The sampling modules that you order with your instrument ship with the
appropriate sampling-module user manuals. Read these manuals for instructions
on how to install your sampling modules, and then install them as outlined.
(Sampling modules do not ship preinstalled.)
Installation
NOTE. After first installing a sampling module(s) or after moving a sampling

module from one compartment to another, you should run compensation from the
Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets it specifications. You must run a
compensation (accessed from the Utilities menu) whenever the extender
configuration is changed from that present at the last compensation. In short, if
you install or remove an 80E00 extender, run a compensation. If you exchange a
extender for one of a different length, run a compensation. For instructions on
running a compensation, see Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 383.
Figure 11 shows compartments for both large and small sampling modules,
along with the plug-in connector for the ESD wrist strap that you must use to
install these modules.
Please place your sampling-module user manuals in Appendix C of this manual
to keep them handy.
Large-module compartments (2)

Small-module compartments (4)
Connect ESD wrist strap here
Figure 11: Compartments for sampling modules
19
Installation
Maximum Configuration
You can install up to two large sampling modules and four small modules for a
total of 10 inputs. Of these 10 inputs, only eight inputs can be active at one time
(see Figure 12, top two configurations). Also, note that installing a single large
module in either compartment disables the first small-module compartment. This
configuration (see Figure 12, bottom configuration) limits the input count to
sevenone from the large, six from the small compartments.
CH 1
CH 2
Eight channels: Two large modules and

three small modules
N.A.1
N.A.
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
CH 6
N.A.
CH 7
CH 8
CH 7
CH 8
N.A.
Eight channels: No large and four

small modules
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
CH 1/N.A.
Seven channels: One large module,
installed in either compartment,
and three small modules
N.A.
N.A.
CH 3
CH 6
CH 2/N.A.
CH 4
CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8
1Not Available
Figure 12: Maximum inputs in three configurations

Install probes, cables, and other connection accessories to your sampling
modules as appropriate for your application and sampling module. Again,
consult your sampling-module and connection-accessory manuals. Continue with
the next section after installing the sampling modules.
110
Installation
Connect the Peripherals

The peripheral connections are mostly the same as those you would make on a
personal computer. The connection points are shown in Figure 13. See
Table 11 on page 112 for additional connection information.
WARNING. Before installing peripheral accessories to connectors (mouse, keyboard,
etc.), power down the instrument. See Powering Off the Instrument on page 114.
Description..........................Icon/Label
Locations
Monitor.........
Printer..................
RS-232................
Network...........................
PS2 mouse1...............................
PS2 keyboard1..................
USB...........................
Audio line out...........................
Audio line in........................
Removable hard drive........................
CD drive.........................
GPIB.....
Monitor...................
Card slot...........
1Product ships with a USB keyboard, that plugs into the USB port, and a USB mouse that plugs into the back of the keyboard
Figure 13: Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel
111
Installation
Table 11: Additional accessory connection information

Item
Description
Monitor
If you use a non-standard monitor, you may need to change the

the Windows-98 display settings to achieve the proper
resolution for your monitor.
Printer
Connect the printer to the EPP (enhanced parallel port)

connector directly. If your printer has a DB-25 connector, use
the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the
EPP connector. For information on printer usage, see Printing
Waveforms on page 3120.
Rackmount
Refer to the CSA8000 & TDS8000 Rackmount Installation

Instructions for information on installing the rackmount kit.
Other
Refer to the Application release notes on your System Rebuild

CD for possible additional accessory installation information
not covered in this manual.
Power On the Instrument

Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time.
1. Check that the line fuses are correct for your application. Both fuses must be
the same rating and type. Fuse types require a unique cap and fuseholder. See
Table 12 and Figure 14.
Table 12: Line fuses
Fuse type
Rating
Fuse part number
Cap & fuseholder

part number
0.25 x 1.250 inch
8 A, fast blow, 250 V
159-0046-00
200-2264-00
5 x 20 mm
6.3 A, fast blow, 250 V
159-0381-00
200-2265-00
Power Switch
Fuses
AC Power
Figure 14: Line fuse and power cord connector locations, rear panel
112
Installation
CAUTION. Connect the keyboard, mouse, and other accessories before applying
power to the product. Connecting the accessories after powering on the
instrument can damage the accessories. Two exceptions are the USB keyboard
and mouse that ships with the instrument. Both can be plugged or unplugged
without first turning power off.
2. Connect the keyboard and mouse, observing the caution above. Note that the
instrument ships with a USB keyboard, which plugs into the USB port (see
Figure 13 on page 111 for location) and a USB mouse, which plugs into
the back of the USB keyboard.
NOTE. Connection of the keyboard and mouse is optional. You can operate most
features without them, using the front-panel controls and the touchscreen.
3. Connect the power cord.
4. If you have an external monitor, connect the power cord and power on the
monitor.
5. Turn the Power switch on at the rear panel. (See Figure 14 on page 112 for
switch location.)
6. Push the On/Standby switch to power on the instrument (see Figure 15 for
the switch location).
Switch
Figure 15: On/Standby switch location

7. Wait for the boot routine and low-level self test to complete.
8. Follow any instructions on the screen.
The internal setup software will automatically configure your instrument and
install all required devices, depending on the installed accessories.
113
Installation
Powering Off the Instrument

The instrument has a built-in soft power-down function that safely powers down
the instrument when you push the On/Standby button. You do not need to close
the UI application or Windows 98 before using the On/Standby button.
To completely remove power to the instrument, first soft power-down the
instrument using the On/Standby button, and then set the power switch on the
rear panel to off.
Create an Emergency Startup Disk

Now that you have completed the basic installation process, you should create an
emergency startup disk that you can use to restart your instrument in case of a
major hardware or software failure. You should create this disk, and then store it
in a safe place.
CAUTION. Create this disk and store it in a safe place. It may allow you to
recover your Windows 98 installation without rebuilding the entire instrument
hard disk.
The emergency startup disk contains basic files to restart your instrument. It also
contains files to check and format the hard disk.
Follow these steps to create the emergency startup disk:
1. Push the RUN/STOP front-panel button to stop acquisition.
2. Minimize the application to the Windows Task bar by clicking the minimize
() button in the upper-right corner of the user interface screen.
3. Click the Windows-98 Start button, point to Settings, and click Control
Panel.
4. In the Control Panel window, double-click Add/Remove Programs.
5. Click the tab for the Startup Disk page.
6. Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and follow the on-screen instructions
to create the startup disk.
7. You can restore the UI application to the screen by clicking its button in the
Windows Task bar.
114
Installation
Back Up User Files

You should back up your user files on a regular basis. Use the Windows-98 Back
Up tool to back up files stored on the hard disk. The Back Up tool is located in
the System Tools folder in the Accessories folder.
1. Minimize the UI application by clicking the minimize () button in the
upper-right corner on screen.
2. Click Start in the Task bar to pop up the Start menu.
3. Select Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Backup in the Start menu.
4. Use the backup tool that displays to select your back-up media and to select
the files and folders that you want to back up. Use the Windows 98 online
help for information on using the Back Up tool. You can back up to the
floppy drive or to a networked storage device over the ethernet port (rear
panel).
5. You can restore the UI application to the screen by clicking its button in the
Windows Task bar.
Software Installation
This section describes how to install the software found on the CSA8000 &
TDS8000 OS Rebuild (063-3491-XX) and Product Software (063-3492-XX)
CDs that accompany this product. The instrument ships with the product
software installed, so only perform these procedures if reinstallation becomes
necessary.
Description
There are two sets of CDs that ship with this instrument:
H
OS Rebuild CD (063-3491-XX). This 2-disk set contains the operating

system for the instrument. This CD set, which can be used to rebuild the
instrument hard drive, includes the Window 98 operating system installation.
If you need to reinstall Windows 98, you may be able to do so without
rebuilding the instrument hard drive. See Operating System Reinstallation on
page 116 for more information.
Product Software CD (063-3492-XX). The product software, or UI

application, complements the hardware controls of the front panel, allowing
complete set up of all instrument features. The Product Software CD
includes software allowing you to reinstall the product software without
having to rebuild the entire operating system.
115
Installation
Software Release Notes
Read the software release notes README.TXT ASCII file if present on the
Product Software CD before performing any installation procedures. This file
contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes other
product documentation.
To view the README.TXT file, open the Notepad Windows accessory and open
the file on the CD. After installation, you can also read the copy from a directory
on the product:
C:\Programs Files\TDSCSA8000\System
A printed version of the Software Release Notes is shipped with the product. The
printed version included with your instrument supercedes the online version
Operating System
Reinstallation
Use the following procedure if reinstalling Windows 98 becomes necessary.

NOTE. Only do the reinstall if Windows 98 is missing or corrupted.
There are two possibilities for reinstall:
H
The instrument can access the hard drive; if so, reinstall Windows using the
emergency startup disk and the procedure Windows 98 Reinstall Only on
page 116.
The instrument cannot access the hard drive or you do not have an emergency startup disk available. In either case, you must rebuild your hard drive
using the procedure System Hard Drive Rebuild on page 117. Any files or
programs you have installed will be lost.
Windows 98 Reinstall Only. If you can access the instrument hard drive and you
have your emergency startup disk, you can reinstall Windows 98 from the hard
drive. This procedure is preferred over rebuilding the hard drive, since the
rebuild rewrites the entire hard drive.
1. Power off the instrument. Use the On/Standby switch if possible; if not, use
the principle power switch found at the back of the instrument.
2. If a keyboard is not connected to the instrument, connect it.
3. Insert your emergency startup disk in the instrument floppy drive.
4. Power on the instrument. Make sure the principle power switch at the back
of the instrument is set on. Push the On/Standby switch on the front panel.
5. The instrument should now boot from the emergency startup disk and
present you with a selection menu. Use the arrow and enter keys to choose
Start the computer without CDROM support.
116
Installation
6. At the a:\ prompt, type c:. Then type cd windows\options\cabs.

7. Type setup. Follow the instructions on screen.
NOTE. At the a:\ prompt, you can type help at anytime to read a file that may be
helpful in getting the Windows 98 operating system up and running.
System Hard Drive Rebuild. If you cannot access the instrument hard drive, you
must rebuild the instrument hard drive. This process will return the hard disk to
the its original condition present when the instrument shipped.
Since data and programs you may have installed are lost with this rebuild, you
should do the Windows 98 Reinstall Only procedure instead if you can. (See
Windows 98 Reinstall Only on page 116.)
If you must rebuild the system hard drive, use the set of OS Rebuild CDs
(063-3491-XX) that shipped with the instrument. Follow the instructions in the
booklet found in the CD case.
System Diagnostics
Window Safe Mode
In case of instrument problems, you may wish to run the system diagnostics. If
so, see the procedure Perform the Diagnostics, on page 120.
If the instrument is turned off before the operating system boots, or if youve
installed a third-party product with a driver incompatible with instrument start
up, Windows 98 will open in Safe mode. The touchscreen will be inoperable;
therefore, you must install the standard-accessory mouse and keyboard to operate
the instrument.
When you have finished investigating and removed any barrier to Windows
start-up, you can reboot. If the instrument no longer boots to Safe mode, you can
remove the keyboard and mouse if desired.
117
Installation
118
Incoming Inspection
This section contains instructions for performing an incoming inspection of this
instrument. Performance of an incoming inspection is not required to put the
instrument in service.
These instructions verify that the instrument is operating correctly after
shipment, but do not check product specifications. An incoming inspection
includes the following parts:
H
Perform the Diagnostics on page 120 runs the internal diagnostics.
Perform a Compensation on page 121 runs the self compensation routine.
Perform the Functional Tests on page 123 uses the DC CALIBRATION

OUTPUT and the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to verify that
the instrument is functioning.
Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests on page 132 uses a
software program called QAPlus/Win to verify instrument hardware and the
Windows 98 operating system is functioning.
If the instrument fails any test within this section, it may need service. To contact
Tektronix for service, see Contacting Tektronix on page xv of Preface.
Make sure you have put the instrument into service as detailed in Installation
starting on page 17. Then assemble the following test equipment and precede
with the procedures that follow.
Assemble Equipment
To complete the incoming inspections procedures requires the following test
equipment:
H
1 One SMA cable, such as Tektronix part number 174-1427-00.
1 One SMA 10X attenuator, such as Tektronix part number 015-1003-00.
1 80E00-series electrical sampling module installed as outlined in its User

manual.
1 80C00-series optical sampling module installed as outlined in its User

manual (optional; test only if purchased with/for your instrument).
119
Incoming Inspection
Perform the Diagnostics

The instrument Diagnostics use internal routines to confirm basic functionality
and proper adjustment.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
First, all sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as

outlined in their user manuals.
Second, power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm-up
before doing this procedure.
1. Set up the instrument: From the application menu bar, select Utilities, and
then select Diagnostics. The Diagnostics dialog box displays. See below.
2. Select a diagnostics suite:

a. In the dialog box, click the Subsytem Level tab.
b. Select the all the entries by clicking the first entry Control Proc and
dragging down to select the rest. All entries should be highlighted as
shown above.
c. In the Run box, leave Loop and Halt on Failure unchecked.
120
Incoming Inspection
3. Verify that the diagnostic suite passes:

a. Click the Run button to execute the diagnostics.
b. The diagnostics may take several minutes to complete. Verify that Pass
appears as Status in the dialog box when the diagnostics complete.
c. If instead an error number appears as Status, rerun the diagnostics. If
Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed
warm up to occur, the module or main instrument may need service.
End of Procedure
Perform the Compensation

This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument compensates
properly.
Equipment
required
For electrical sampling modules:

H
50 ohm terminators, part number 015-1022-xx.

(Quantity to match number of electrical channels to
compensate.)
The sampling modules shipped from Tektronix with the proper

terminator installed.
Prerequisites
First, all sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as

outlined in their user manuals.
Second, power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm-up
before doing this procedure.
1. Run the compensation routines:

a. From the application menu bar, select Utilities, and then select Compensation.
In the Compensation dialog box, the main instrument (mainframe) and
sampling modules are listed. The temperature change from the last
compensation is also listed. See Figure 16 on page 122.
121
Incoming Inspection
Click to select compensate

Choose all as targets
Click to start compensation
Figure 16: Compensation dialog box

b. Wait until the Status for all items you wish to compensate changes from
Warm Up to Pass, Fail, or Comp Reqd.
c. Under Select Action, click the Compensate option button.
d. From the top pulldown list, choose All (default selection) to select the
main instrument and all its modules as targets to compensate.
e. Click the Execute button to begin the compensation.
f.
Follow the instructions to disconnect inputs and install terminations that

will appear on screen; be sure to follow static precautions (see the user
manual for your sampling module) when following these instructions.
NOTE. Failing to install the 50-ohm terminations on electrical inputs can yield
erroneous compensation failures or results.
2. Verify that the compensation routines pass:
a. The compensation may take several minutes to complete. Verify that
Pass appears as Status for the main instrument and for all sampling
modules listed in the Compensation dialog box when compensation
completes.
b. If instead Fail appears as Status, rerun the compensation. If Fail status
continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up
to occur, the module or main instrument may need service.
122
Incoming Inspection
c. If you want to save the compensation constants generated by this

compensation, click the Save option button under Select Action. Click
the Execute button to save the compensation.
End of Procedure
Perform the Functional Tests

These procedures use the DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT and the INTERNAL
CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to further verify that the instrument functions
properly. An SMA cable and a 10x attenuator are required to do these test
procedures.
The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the instrument functions
properly. The equipment required is intentionally kept to a minimum.
STOP. These procedures verify functions; that is, they verify that the instrument
features operate. They do not verify that they operate within limits; therefore, do
not interpret any quantities cited (such as about five horizontal divisions) as
limits.
STOP. DO NOT make changes to the front-panel settings that are not called out
in the procedures. Each verification procedure will require you to set the
instrument to default settings before verifying functions. If you make changes to
these settings, other than those called out in the procedure, you may obtain
invalid results. In this case, go back to step 1 and repeat the procedure.
Verify Electrical Input

Channels
Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

Equipment
required
One SMA cable, such as Tektronix part number 174-1427-00.
Prerequisites
At least one electrical (80E00 series) sampling module must be

installed as outlined in its user manual.
1. Initialize the instrument: Push the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button.
123
Incoming Inspection
2. Set the Trigger System: In the UI application toolbar, select Internal Clock
from the Trig list box as shown below.
3. Hook up the signal source: Connect the SMA cable from the DC CALIBRATION output to the channel input that you want to test as shown in
Figure 17, below.
CSA8000/TDS8000
SMA cable from DC calibration

output to 80E00 C3 input
Figure 17: Hookup for electrical functional tests

4. Set the DC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT:
a. Push the Vertical MENU front-panel button. This displays the Vert
Setup dialog box.
b. Enter a level of 200 m in the DC CAL box.
c. Push the Vertical MENU front-panel button again to dismiss the Vert
Setup dialog box.
5. Select the channel to test: Push the channel button for the channel you want
to test. The button lights and the channel display comes on. See Figure 18.
124
Incoming Inspection
Channel
buttons
Figure 18: Channel button location

6. Verify that the channel is operational: Confirm that the following statements
are true:
H
The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting of
100 mV, and a DC level is at about 2 divisions above center screen.
The front-panel vertical POSITION knob (for the channel you are
testing) moves the DC level up and down the screen when rotated.
Return the DC level to 2 divisions above center screen before continuing.
Turning the vertical SCALE knob to 50 mV changes the amplitude of

the DC level to about 4 divisions above center screen, and returning the
knob to 100 mV returns the amplitude to about 2 divisions.
7. Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes: Push the
front-panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box.
Click each of the three acquisition modes, and confirm that the following
statements are true:
H
Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen. (Note

that there is a small amount of noise present on the DC level).
Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with

the noise reduced.
Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with

the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed.
8. Test all channels: Repeat steps 2 through 7 until all electrical input channels
are verified.
9. Remove the test hookup: Disconnect the SMA cable from the channel input
and the DC CALIBRATION output.
125
Incoming Inspection
Verify Optical Input

Channels
After verifying the electrical channels and if you have an 80C00 Series Sampling
Module installed, you can now verify its the optical channels. This verification is
done without an input signal.
Equipment
required
None.
Prerequisites
At least one optical (80C00 series) sampling module must be installed

as outlined in its user manual.

2. Set the Trigger System: In the UI application toolbar, select Internal Clock
from the Trig list box as shown below.
3. Select the channel to test: Push the channel button for the channel you want
to test. The button lights amber and the channel displays. See Figure 19.
Channel
buttons

4. Verify that the channel is operational: Confirm that the following statements
are true.
126
Incoming Inspection
The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a baseline
trace at about center screen (see Figure 110 on page 127) and a setting
as follows:
80C01, 80C02, and 80C04: 1 mW
80C03: 100 mW
80C05: 3 mW
80C06: 6 mW
The Vertical POSITION front-panel knob (for the channel you are
testing) moves the signal up and down the screen when rotated. Return
the baseline trace to center screen before before continuing.
Turning the Vertical OFFSET front-panel knob counterclockwise offsets

the baseline towards the bottom of the screen, turning the knob
clockwise offsets the baseline towards the top of the screen, and
returning the knob to 0.000 offset returns the baseline to center screen.
Baseline
Vertical offset
Control bar
Vertical offset
setting
Figure 110: Optical channel verification
127
Incoming Inspection
5. Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes: Push the
front-panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box.
Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following
statements are true:
H
Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen. (Note

that there may be a small amount of noise present on the baseline level).
Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with

any noise present reduced.
Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with

the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed.
6. Test all channels: Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all optical input channels
are verified.
Verify the
Time Bases Work
After verifying the channels, you can now verify that the time bases function.
This verification is done using a front-panel signal.
Equipment
required
One SMA cable, such as Tektronix part number 174-1427-00.

One 10x SMA attenuator, such as Tektronix 015-1003-00.
One electrical (80E00-series) sampling module.
Prerequisites
None

2. Hook up the signal source: Connect the SMA cable from the Internal Clock
output through a 10x attenuator to any 80E00 sampling module input
channel as shown in Figure 111.
CSA8000/TDS8000
SMA cable from

INTERNAL CLOCK
output to 80E00 C3 input
10x attenuator
Figure 111: Hookup for the time base tests
128
Incoming Inspection
3. Set up the instrument:

a. Push the Trigger MENU front-panel button to display the Trig Setup
dialog box.
b. Click Internal Clock under Trigger Source in the Trig Setup dialog
box. The Internal Clock rate should be set to 200kHz.
c. Push the Trigger MENU front-panel button again to dismiss the Trig
Setup dialog box.
d. Push the channel button for the channel you connected to in step 2. The
button lights and the channel display comes on. See Figure 112,
page 129.
e. Turn the Vertical SCALE knob to set the vertical scale to 20 mV/div.
The channel scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom
of the graticule.
Channel
buttons

4. Set the time base: Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 ms/div. The horizontal
scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule.
5. Verify that the Main time base operates: Confirm the following statements
are true:
H
One period of the internal clock signal (a square wave) is about five
horizontal divisions on-screen. See Figure 113 on page 130.
129
Incoming Inspection
Rotating the Horizontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform

on-screen (more horizontal divisions per waveform period), counterclockwise rotation contracts it, and returning the horizontal scale to
1 ms/div returns the period to about five divisions. Leave the time base
set to 1 ms/div.
The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right
on-screen when rotated.
NOTE. The signal will not move past the minimum position setting.
Internal Clock
Signal
Control bar
Vertical scale
setting
Horizontal
scale setting
Figure 113: Main time base verification

6. Set up the Mag1 time base:
a. Push the Horizontal View MAG1 button on the front panel. The Mag1
time base view will display under the Main time base view.
b. Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 ms/div. The horizontal scale readout is
displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule and is now
reading out the scale of the Mag1 time base view.
130
Incoming Inspection
7. Verify that the Mag1 time base operates: Confirm the following statements.
H
The brackets on the Main View waveform (top graticule) are a fullscreen width apart (10 divisions). See Figure 114 on page the 131.
One period of the internal clock signal (a square wave) in the Mag view
(bottom graticule) is about five horizontal divisions on-screen. (Matches
the waveform in the top graticule.) See Figure 114.
Rotating the Horizontal SCALE knob clockwise to 500 ns/div expands

the waveform in the bottom graticule to double the period (about
10-horizontal divisions per waveform period) and returning the
Horizontal SCALE knob to 1 ms/div returns the period to about five
divisions. Leave the Horizontal Scale set to 1 ms/div.
Left Mag time base

marker
Right Mag time base

marker
Main time base view
Mag time base view
Figure 114: Mag time base verification

8. Verify that the Mag2 time base operates:
a. Push the Mag1 button to remove the display of the Mag1 time base.
b. Perform steps 6 and 7, but use the Mag2 button instead of the Mag1.
End of Functional Test Procedures
131
Incoming Inspection
Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests

These procedures verify the instrument hardware functions. A diagnostics
program called QAPlus/Win is used to make the verifications. No equipment is
required.
QAPlus/WIN
QAPlus/WIN is a comprehensive software application used to check and verify

the operation of the PC hardware in the portable mainframe. This procedure use
QAPlus/WIN to run its Quick Test, to verify the instrument hardware. To run
QAPlus/WIN, you must have either a working keyboard or a working mouse or
other pointing device installed and have Windows 98 running.
CAUTION. Before running the QAPlus/WIN tests, be aware of the following
problems and work-arounds.
H
The QAPlus/WIN discrete memory test fails if the system being tested
contains more than 16 megabytes of RAM.
Since your product ships with more than 16 megabytes of RAM, do not run
the memory test from the Memory icon. Use the Run Quick Test item from
the Tests menu instead, or use the Quick Test icon in the QAPlus/WIN title
box.
The QAPlus/WIN hard drive test may report an incorrect number of tracks
and cylinders for your hard drive.
This is an internal mapping problem, but has no effect on the results of the
test. Bad sectors on your hard drive are still found and marked.
The installation program for QAPlus/WIN stalls at the end of installation.

To continue after the installation stalls, press CTRL-ALT-DEL, highlight the
QAPlus/WIN installation program, and then click End Task.
The QAPlus/WIN keyboard test does not respond correctly to keys used by
Windows 98.
Keyboards made for use with Windows contain two or three keys specific to
that operating system. These are usually located on either side of the space
bar. QAPlus/WIN does not trap these keys when performing the keyboard
test. Do not press them.
132
Incoming Inspection
Checking the Cooling Fan

Operation
Checking the Hardware

and Operating System
(Optional)
DismissPower on the instrument and visually inspect the left side panel of the
instrument to verify that all six cooling fans are rotating.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
The instrument must be powered on and running.
To perform a minimal check of the hardware and Windows 98 operating system

of this instrument, perform this procedure to run QAPlus/Win diagnostics from
the Windows 98 Start menu.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
A mouse and keyboard must be ocnnected to the instrument and it

must be powered on.
1. Push the RUN/STOP front-panel button to stop acquisition.

2. Minimize the application to the Windows Task bar by clicking the minimize
() button in the upper-right corner of the application on screen.
3. Click Start, then select Programs, and then Sykes Diagnostics in the Start
Menu. Finally, click QA+Win32.
4. Click Tools on the menu bar, then click Customize Test...
5. Click Default and exit this dialog by clicking OK.
6. Select and execute the following tests by clicking on the highlighted test
buttons (in Figure below) one at a time and clicking Start:
a. COM Ports
b. LPT Ports
c. System Board
d. System Info
e. USB
f.
Video
133
Incoming Inspection
Follow any instructions appearing on the screen.

7. Check test results in scrollable results listing in the lower left corner of the
QAPlus test window. All tests should pass.
8. Close the QAPlus/Win diagnostics by selecting Exit in the File menu.
9. You can restore the product software application to the screen by clicking the
TDS/CSA8000 icon in the Windows Task bar.
End of Procedure
134
Accessories and Options

This section lists the standard and optional accessories available for the
instrument, as well as the product options.
Accessories
Standard
Table 13 lists the standard accessories that ship with the instrument,
NOTE. Table 13 lists the standard accessories that ship with the instrument, not
those shipped with any electrical or optical sampling modules ordered. Each
sampling module ships individually in their own package. Consult the User
manual found in the shipping package for any module you ordered:
H
80E01, 80E02, 80E03 & 80E04 Electrical Sampling Module User

Manual.
Part no. 071-0434-XX
80C00 Optical Sampling Module User Manual.
Part no. 071-0435-XX
Table 13: Standard accessories

Item
Part Number
Certificate of Traceable Calibration for product at initial

shipment
Not Orderable
Business reply card
Not Orderable
1 Windows-98 compatible keyboard
119-6297-00
1 Windows-98 compatible mouse
119-6298-00
1 Instrument front cover
200-4519-00
1 Accessory pouch
016-1441-00
2 Touchscreen styluses
119-6107-00
1 ESD wrist strap with 6 foot coiled cord
006-3415-04
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Online Help (part of application

software)
Not Applicable
071-0433-XX
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Reference
071-0437-XX
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Programmer Online Guide (part of

application software)
Not Applicable
135
Table 13: Standard accessories (Cont.)

Item
Optional
Part Number
CSA8000 & TDS8000 OS Rebuild CDs (this 2-disk set

includes a certificate of authenticity for software and a restore
license)
063-3491-XX
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Product Software CD
0633492XX
Power cord
Order by Option Number
The following accessories are orderable for use with the instrument at the time
this manual originally published. Consult a current Tektronix catalog for
additions, changes, and details:
Table 14: Optional accessories
Item
136
Part Number
DL-11 Dual Delay Line
DL-11
SIU-800 Static Isolation Unit
SIU-800
Sampling Module Extender (1 meter)
012-1568-00
Sampling Module Extender (2 meter)
012-1569-00
3.5 Male to 3.5 Female SMA
015-0552-00
Slip-on SMA connector
015-0553-00
2X Attenuator (SMA Male-to-Female)
015-1001-00
5X Attenuator (Male-to-Female)
015-1002-00
Power Divider
015-1014-00
BNC Female 75 Ohm to 50 Ohm

Type N Minimum Loss Attenuator
131-0112-00
P6209 4 GHz Active FET Probe
P6209
P6150 9 GHz Passive Probe
P6150
Replacement hard disk drive
119-6241-00
CSA8000 & TDS8000 Service Manual
071-0438-XX
Options
The following options can be ordered for the instrument:
H
Option 1K: Cart
Option 1R: Rack Mount Kit (includes hardware and instructions for
converting to rackmount configuration)
International Power Cords Options:
Option A1 Universal Euro 220V, 50 Hz
Option A2 UK 240V, 50 Hz
Option A3 Australian 240V, 50 Hz
Option A5 Switzerland 220V, 50 Hz
Option AC China 220V, 50 Hz
Option A99 No power cord shipped
Service offerings:
H
Option C3: Three years of calibration services
Option D3: Test Data for calibration services in Opt. C3
Option R3: Repair warranty extended to cover three years
Option D1: Calibration data report
137
138
Operational Maps
This chapter acquaints you with how the instrument functions and operates. It
consists of several maps that describe the system, its operation, and its documentation:
H
Documentation Map, on page 22, lists the documentation that supports the
instrument.
System Overview Maps on page 24, describe the high-level operating blocks
and operating cycle of the instrument.
User-Interface Map, on page 27, describes the elements of the User Interface
(UI) application, which provides complete control of the instrument.
Front-Panel Map, on page 28, describes the elements of the instrument

front panel and cross references information relevant to each element.
Display Maps, on page 29, describe elements and operation of single-graticule

and multiple-graticule displays.
I/O Maps, on page 211, describe input/output ports and peripherals.
Tutorial procedures are available online, as part of the online help. To display,
select the Setups Guide from the UI application Help menu.
For information on configuring and installing your instrument, refer to
Chapter 1, Getting Started.
21
Documentation Map
This instrument ships with documents individually tailored to address different
aspects or parts of the product features and interface. The table below cross
references each document to the instrument features and interfaces it supports.
To read about...
Refer to these documents:
Description
Standard accessories or packing list
Graphical packing list
The graphical packing list is the first thing you

should see when you open the instrument box.
It shows all items as they are packaged in the
box.
Installation, Specification, & Operation

(overviews)
Main User Manual

Quick Reference Manual
CD booklets
Additionally, all standard accessories are listed

on page 135 of this manual.
Read the Reference for a quick overview of
instrument features and their usage.
Read the User Manual for general information
about your instrument procedures on how to
put it into service, specifications of its performance, maps of its user interface controls,
overviews and background on its features.
Specific installation information for both the
operating system (OS) and product software is
located in each of the CD booklets accompanying the CDs.
For more detailed usage information, see
Online Help System, below.
All about the Sampling Modules
22
Electrical, Optical, or Other

Sampling Module User Manual
Read these manuals for complete information

about the sampling modules you purchased
how to install them in the instrument, how to
use them, and how to protect them from ESD.
Depending on the modules ordered, one or
more of these manuals ship with this product.
Insert these manuals in back of the manual that
you are reading now.
Operating Basics
To read about...
Refer to these documents:
Description
In Depth Operation and UI Help
Online Help System
Access online help from the instrument for

context-sensitive information on virtually all
controls and elements on screen.
Online help includes a setup guide of procedures for applying all instrument functions. See
Accessing Online Help on page 3145.
Online Programmers Guide
GPIB Commands
<Space>
<NR3>
?
Access this online guide from the instrument

from its Help menu. Quickly find the syntax for
any command, and copy the command if
desired. Read about communication, error
handling, and other information on GPIB usage.
Additionally, the printable version of this online
help file is available in PDF format on the
Tektronix website. See Contacting Tektronix for
information on how to access our website.
You may also want to obtain the optional service manual for this product if you
self-service or performance test this instrument. See Optional Accessories on
page 136.
23
System Overview Maps

The instrument and its sampling modules comprise a highly capable waveform
acquisition, test, and measurement system. The following model provides
background information on its operation, which, in turn, may provide you insight
on how the instrument can be used.
Functional Model Map

Modular Sampling
Specialization
Input Modules
CH1..8
Digital Signal Acquisition
Channel
Channel
Channel
Trigger
system
Page 337
External trigger
inputs
Display, I/O,
& Storage
User Interface
& Waveform Display
Chan 18
Acquisition
system
Page 319
Page 313
Page 35
Clock recovery
options only
Signal Processing
& Transformation
Timebase
system
SP&T
systems
Pages
365,
389,
3123
Page 347
Ref 18
Math 18
Page 389,
347
The model comprises five high-level subsystems or processes (embodying a

variety of hardware and software functions):
24
Modular Sampling Specialization System. Allows you to choose modules

to begin tailoring your waveform acquisition based on the types of signals
you want to acquire: electrical or optical; with clock recovery or without,
with bandwidth filter or not. Provides cost-effective solution for users
needing very high bandwidth with superb time resolution on repetitive
waveforms. Sampling modules determine the size of the vertical acquisition
window for each channel.
Digital Signal Acquisition System. Acquires a waveform record from each

signal you apply to each channel using the following subsystems:
Operating Basics
Acquisition System. Sets vertical offset for the vertical acquisition

window for each channel. Performs the actual A/D conversion and
storing of digitized samples. Also performs post A/D sample-based
corrections to compensate for non-linearities of various analog circuits.
Trigger System. Recognizes a specific event of interest on the input

trigger signal and informs the Timebase of the trigger events occurrence,
gating the taking of a sample after a controlled, incremental delay (see
page 316). The trigger event is defined as time zero for the waveform
record, which means that all samples are displayed relative to this point.
There is no internal trigger pick off from the channels; rather, a trigger
signal must be obtained through the external trigger inputs, from the
system clock, or from the clock recovery when available from optical
modules equipped with clock recovery.
Timebase System. Tells the Acquisition system to take a sample (i.e.

convert from analog to digital) at some specific time relative to the
trigger (or clock) event. In more general terms, synchronizes the
capturing of digital samples in the Acquisition system to the trigger
events generated from the Trigger system.
Signal Processing Transformation System. Performs a variety of transformations or operations, beginning with the most fundamental data
elements in the system, the channel waveforms. Waveform math operations,
automatic measurements, and histogram generation are examples.
Display, Input/Output, Storage Systems. Provides display control. Sets the

vertical scale and position of the display, which controls how much of the
vertical acquisition window appears on screen. Provides output (and
sometimes input) of instrument-data elements in a form suitable to the user.
The process overview that follows describes each step in the top-level cycle of
instrument operation.
25
Operating Basics
Process Overview Map

Process overview
Process block description
Idling...
Yes
Stop
condition?
Reset
Abort
Power On1
No
1.
The instrument starts in the idle state; it enters this state

upon power up, upon receiving most control setting changes,
or upon finishing acquisition tasks.
2.
When you toggle its RUN/STOP control to RUN, the

instrument implements its setup based on the current
control settings (upon start up, these are default or last
setup depending on user-set preferences).
3.
The instrument then begins waiting for a trigger. No sampling

takes place until triggering criteria are met or a free-run
trigger is forced (Auto-trigger mode only). The instrument
accepts trigger.
4.
The instrument then waits a delay time, that is, it delays

taking a sample until a specified time elapses, where:
Implement
setup
Wait for trigger/

accept trigger
Delay time = Horizontal Pos. + Ch. Deskew + N sample intervals
Wait Delay time
In the above calculation, N = Current sample count 1

For example, if taking the 6th sample in the waveform record,
5 sample intervals are added.
Add one
sample interval
to Delay
e time
me
5.
The instrument takes one sample for each waveform record

(channel) for each active (on) timebase. This instrument
sequentially samples: one sample is taken per trigger for
each active channel in each displayed timebase.
6.
If averaging or enveloping is on, each record becomes part of

a multi-acquisition record that these modes produce (see
page 320). The process loops back to step 3 above to
acquire additional records until the number of acquisitions
required for the acquisition mode currently set are processed,
and then processing continues as for step 8 below.
7.
If FrameScan mode is on, the acquisition process is

modified. See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 329 for
information on how FrameScan works.
8.
At this point the acquisition record is in channel acquisition

memory and is available to the instrument for measurement
of its parameters, display, output, and so on.
The instrument then checks for user-specified stop condition
and either returns to its idle state or continues at step 3,
according to what it finds.
Take 1 sample
per active
e
channel
No
Waveform
re r
record
complete?
Yes
Waveform
available
26
Note: if acquiring when powered down, the oscilloscope may skip the
idle state and resume acquisition starting with step 3.
User Interface Map Complete Control and Display

Menu Bar: Access to data I/O,
printing, online help system,
and set-up functions
Status Bar. Trigger status

and waveform count
Tool Bar: Handy access to

key features, including the
setup dialogs, acquisition
modes, triggering modes,
and online help
Measurements Bar: Quick
access to the automated
measurements by category;
click measurement buttons to
measure the selected waveform
Display: Live, reference, and
math waveforms display here,
along with cursors, masks,
etc. to analyze them
Waveform Bar: Access to
waveform selection (click),
waveform position (drag),
and waveform properties
(right-click)
Readout Bar. Toggle

individual readouts on and
off by clicking its button
A Readout. Right click
any readout to display a
short-cut menu providing
handy access to
often-used setup controls
and properties for the
feature associated with
the readout
Readouts: Display up
to five readouts in this
area, selectable from
the Readout Bar
Controls Bar: Quick access

to waveforms and timebases
for display, and to their scale,
offset, and position controls
for adjustment
27
Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features

Turn knob to adjust most control fields in setup dialogs.
Press the Select button to switch among fields. Press the
Fine button to toggle between normal and fine adjustment.
Press to start and stop acquisition or clear
all channel waveforms at once. Page 325.
Press a Menu button to quickly access the setup dialog for
its control group for more detailed set up.
Press to display measurement cursors and set the knob
and Fine (adjust) and Select buttons to control them.
Page 381.
Press to quickly return to instrument-default
control settings. Page 312.
Press to automatically set up the instrument controls
based on selected channels. Page 311.
Press to access print dialog for
printing the display. Page 3120.
Press to display the cluster of Setup Dialogs
for comprehensive set up of the instrument.
Press to toggle the touch screen on and off. Use the
touch screen to control UI when you havent installed a
mouse. Page 353.
Select a waveform type, Channel,
Reference, or Math, to display or adjust on
screen (selected button lights). Page 355.
Press to display and select a waveform not yet displayed;
press to select among displayed waveforms;
press again to turn a selected waveform off.
Button lights indicate displayed and selected waveforms.
Page 355.
Press to display and select a time base view not
selected, or to select among displayed views;
press selected timebase again to toggle it off
(except Main which is always on). Page 357.
Turn knobs to vertically scale, position, and

offset selected waveform. Page 38.
Turn knobs to Horizontally scale, position,
and set record length of selected waveform.
Page 39.
Use controls to set trigger level and lights
to monitor trigger state. Page 345.
28
Display Map Single Graticule View

Drag cursors to measure
waveforms on screen.
Drag the Horizontal Reference to move
the point around which horizontal scaling
expands and contracts the waveforms.
Drag the Waveform Icon vertically
to position waveform.
Right click on a waveform or its
icon for handy access to often
used setup controls and properties.
Drag ground reference icon to add
offset to a waveform.
Drag across the waveform area to
zoom the boxed waveform segment
to full screen width.
29
Display Map Multiple Views

Drag the markers to enclose
the portion of waveform to
appear in Mag 2 View.
Drag the markers to enclose
the portion of waveform to
appear in Mag 1 View.
MAIN View
210
Mag
View
Mag
View
Drag the border between

graticules to vertically size
Main, Mag1, and Mag2
Views.
Front Panel I/O Map
Floppy disk drive accessible

from Windows 98
Compartments for large

modules, up to two channels
INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT

DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT
Compartments for small

modules, up to eight channels
EXTERNAL 10 MHZ REFERENCE INPUT
ANTISTATIC CONNECTION for wrist
strap, 1 MW to ground
TRIGGER
PRESCALE
TRIGGER
DIRECT
input
input
TRIGGER
PROBE
POWER
211
Rear Panel I/O Map
Removable hard disk drive to provide

individual environment for each user or to
secure data, press to release
CDROM drive accessible from
Windows 98, press to open
USB connector for mouse or

keyboard and mouse
PS-2 connectors for mouse and keyboard
Upper VGA port to connect a second

monitor for side-by-side display
Lower VGA port to connect a
monitor for oscilloscope display
Parallel port (Centronics) to

connect printer or other device
GPIB port to connect to controller
RJ-45 connector to connect to network

COM1 serial port
Card Bus slots for two PCMCIA type-1

cards, two type-2 cards, or one type-3 card
212
Overview
This chapter describes how the many features of the instrument operate. Please
note the following points on using this chapter:
H
Each section in this chapter provides background information needed to

operate the instrument effectively as well as the higher-level procedures for
accessing and using the features. These procedures emphasize using the front
panel when possible.
Lower-level, detailed usage procedures are in the online help system.
The table that follows lists the sections in this chapter.

Section
Description
Acquiring Waveforms
Provides an overview of capturing signals and digitizing them into waveforms
Triggering
Provides an overview of the instrument trigger features and their use
337
Displaying Waveforms
Provides an overview of display operation
347
Measuring Waveforms
Provides an overview of the the cursors and automatic measurements tools this
instrument provides and how to use them
365
Creating Math Waveforms
Provides an overview of how you can mathematically combine acquired waveforms and
measurement scalars to create a math waveform that supports your data-analysis task
389
Data Input and Output
Provides an overview of the input and output capabilities of your instrument
3101
Using Masks, Histograms,

and Waveform Databases
Provides an overview of the statistical tools this instrument provides and how to use
them: mask testing, histograms, and waveform databases
3123
Accessing Online Help
Provides an overview of the help system, which is integrated as part of the instrument
user interface, and describes how to access it
3145
Cleaning the Instrument
Provides instructions on how to clean the exterior of the instrument and its touch screen
3153
Page no.
33
31
Overview
32
Acquiring Waveforms
Before you can display, measure, or analyze a waveform, you must acquire it
from a signal. This instrument comes equipped with the features you need for
capturing your waveforms. The following topics provide an overview of capturing signals and digitizing them into waveform records:
H
Signal Connection and Scaling: How to connect signals to the instrument

channels; how to offset channels and position and scale the time bases for
acquiring waveforms; how to scale and position waveforms in the display.
Setting Acquisition Controls: How to choose the appropriate acquisition mode

for acquiring your waveforms; how to start and stop acquisition.
Acquisition Control Background: Information describing the data-sampling

and acquisition processes.
FrameScan Acquisitions: How to use FrameScan acquisition to help analyze

pattern-dependent failures in high bit-rate communications signals.
Sampling
module
Acquisition
system
Trigger
system
Time base
system
Signal processing
& transformation
system
Output and
storage
User Interface
and display
NOTE. This section describes how the vertical and horizontal controls define the
acquisition of live, channel waveforms. These controls also define how all
waveforms are displayed, both live and derived waveforms (math and reference
waveforms). The sections that follow cover display-related usage follow:
H
Displaying Waveforms on page 347.
Creating Math Waveforms on page 389.
33
Acquiring Waveforms
Signal Connection and Scaling

This section presents an overview of the instrument features related to setting up
the input signal for digitizing and acquisition. It addresses the following topics:
H
Where to find information for installing sampling modules and connecting

input signals
How to turn on channels and adjust their vertical scale, position, and offset
How to set the horizontal scale, position, and record length of the Main (time
base) View
NOTE. Terminology: This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and
horizontal acquisition window. These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal
range of the acquisition window, which defines the segment of the input signal
that the acquisition system acquires. The terms do not refer to any windows or
display windows on screen. See Conventions on page xiv.
Vertical
Offset
Sampling
module
Vertical
Position
Display
system
Acquisition
system
Horizontal
Scale
Horizontal
Position
Vertical
Scale
Horizontal
Record
Length
Figure 31: Acquisition and display controls
Why Use?
Use signal conditioning and scaling controls to ensure the instrument acquires
the data that you want to display, measure, or otherwise process. To ensure the
best possible data for further processing, you do the following:
H
34
Set vertical scale to adjust the waveform size on screen. You can set vertical
offset to shift the vertical acquisition window up or down on the signal to
capture the portion you want.
Acquiring Waveforms
Set horizontal scale to control the time duration of the horizontal acquisition
window to capture as much as you want of the input signal(s). To control
where in the input signal (data stream) that the horizontal acquisition
window acquires, you set horizontal position to delay the window relative to
a trigger to capture the waveform portion you want. To increase or decrease
the resolution between sample points, change the record length.
For more background on the acquisition window concepts, see Signal Conditioning Background on page 312.
Whats Special?
Whats Excluded?
A Versatile Autoset. Autoset can be defined to set up for a waveform edge, period,
or an eye/bit pattern. Pushing the Autoset button automatically sets up the
instrument controls for a usable display based on the property you choose and
the characteristics of the input signal. Autoset is much faster and easier than a
manual control-by-control setup. You can also reset the instrument to its factory
default settings by pushing the Default Setup button.
The vertical offset cannot be adjusted for any reference waveform, because a
reference waveform is a static, saved waveform, and offset adjusts the acquisition hardware for acquiring live waveforms. Also, TDR waveforms, if displayed
in rho or ohm units, cannot be adjusted for vertical offset.
The vertical offset of a math waveform cannot be adjusted directly. You can
adjust the offset of waveform sources (waveforms included in the math
expression) for the math waveform if the sources are live waveforms.
Keys to Using
The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up input
scaling, offset, and position to properly acquire your waveforms.
Sampling Modules Selection and Signal Connection. Select the sampling module,
optical or electrical, that best fits your sampling task, whether it is connecting to
a fiber or electrical cable to test a digital data stream, or to a test fixture through
SMA cables to characterize a device. The connection to the sampling module
depends on your application.
Tektronix provides 80E00-series (electrical) and 80C00-series (optical) sampling
modules for this instrument; you can read about any sampling module and its
connections in the sampling-module user manual(s) that shipped with your
product. (Insert your sampling-module user manual(s) in Appendix C at the back
of this manual for ready reference.) You can also check your Tektronix catalog
for connection accessories that may support your application.
Up to eight acquisition channels are available, depending on the sampling
modules installed. Each channel can be displayed as a waveform or can
contribute waveform data to other waveforms (math and reference waveforms,
for example).
35
Acquiring Waveforms
CAUTION. Install sampling modules before applying power and before connecting them to the signals you want to test. See your sampling-module user manual
for instructions.

observe static-safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling-module
user manual.
Coupling Concerns. Electrical sampling modules provide only straight-DC
coupling to their sampling circuits, with no protection. All modules specify a
maximum vertical nondestructive range that limits signals to small levels,
typically about 2 to 3 volts (DC + ACpkpk). (See Specifications in the user
manual for your sampling module for exact limits.) Do not exceed the limit, even
momentarily, as the input channel may be damaged.
All modules also specify a dynamic range that, if exceeded, could cause
acquisition and measurement errors due to nonlinearity. Do not exceed this limit.
(See Specifications in the user manual for your sampling module for exact
limits.)
NOTE. Optical sampling modules may have dynamic range exceeded without
obvious visual indications onscreen because the photo detector and/or filters
used may not necessarily be able to pass through overloaded signals to the
sampler.
Use external attenuators if necessary to prevent exceeding the limits just
described. Note that there are no hardware bandwidth filters in most sampling
modules or in the instrument. (Some optical sampling modules have bandwidth
filters settable from the Vertical Setup menu of the instrument. See the user
manual for your optical sampling module for more information.)
Scaling, Offset, and Positioning Considerations. These key controls determine the
portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system:
H
36
Set the vertical offset to display the features of interest on your waveform
and avoid clipping. (See Note that follows.) Adjust the display control
Vertical Scale to control the portion of the vertical window displayed on
screen; adjust the display control Vertical Position to position the waveform
on screen. Note that vertical offset affects the vertical acquisition window,
but vertical scale and position do not. These last two controls are display
controls only. Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 313
describes the vertical acquisition window.
Acquiring Waveforms
Clipped
Set horizontal scale, position, and resolution (record length) so that the
acquired waveform record includes the signal attributes of interest with good
sampling density on the waveform. The settings you make define the
horizontal acquisition window, described in Horizontal Acquisition Window
Considerations on page 316. (Good sample density might be at least
five samples on each waveform transition when acquiring for timing
measurements. The trade off for increased sample density is increased time
to acquire.)
NOTE. Waveform data outside the vertical acquisition window is clipped; that is,
the data is limited to the minimum and/or maximum boundaries of the vertical
acquisition window. This limiting can cause inaccuracies in amplitude-related
measurements. See Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 313.
Trigger and Display. Set basic trigger controls to gate waveform acquisition, and
use the display to interactively set scale, position, and offset waveforms. See the
sections Triggering on page 337 and Displaying Waveforms on page 347.
Selected Waveform. Many of the controls of this instrument, especially the
vertical controls, operate on the selected waveform. The instrument applies all
actions that only affect one waveform at a time, such as applying a changes to
the vertical control settings, to the selected waveform.
NOTE. You can select a channel waveform, a math waveform, or a reference
waveform. The procedures here describe how to select and set up channel
waveforms for acquisition. See Displaying Waveforms on page 347 for
information regarding using the controls for adjusting display of reference and
math waveforms.
Flexible Control Access. The product provides multiple methods for adjusting
acquisition controls. This manual focuses on basic setup through the front panel,
and then through use of the User Interface (UI) Application displayed full screen.
37
Acquiring Waveforms
See the display maps, beginning on page 29, for UI alternatives to controlling
vertical and horizontal setup. The online help system also documents the UI.
To Set Up the Signal Input
Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to scale and
position input signals for acquisition.
observe static-safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling-module
user manual.
Overview
To set the signal input
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must be installed with sampling modules

in place. The acquisition system should be set to run
continuously.
Also, an appropriate trigger signal must be routed to the
instrument and triggering must be set up.
Connect the 2.
input signal
Related control elements and resources
See the sampling-module user manuals for

sampling module installation. See page 323 for
acquisition setup and page 345 for trigger setup
in this manual.
Connect to the signal to be acquired using proper

probing/connecting techniques. See the user manual for
the sampling module you have chosen.
Note: For more details on controlling vertical setup,
push the Vertical MENU button to display the Vertical
Setup dialog box, and then click its HELP button.
Select the input 3.

signal channel
Push the channel button (turns amber) to assign

the waveform buttons, 1 8, to operate on
channel waveforms. Push a waveform button to
select the signal channel (it displays).
A waveform button lights when its channel is on:
H
When on but not selected, its button is lighted

green.
When on and selected, its button is lighted

amber.
Hint. To select one of the channels already

displayed, you can use a mouse and click its trace
or its reference indicator to select it.
38
Acquiring Waveforms
Overview
Set the vertical 4.

acquisition
window
Use the Vertical Offset knob to adjust the selected

waveform on screen. Use the Vertical Scale and
Position knobs to adjust the display.
Positioned vertically
Scaled vertically
Offset vertically
Set the horizon- 5.

tal acquisition
window
Push the View Main button to make sure the main time
base view is selected. Use horizontal knobs to scale and
position the waveform on screen and to set sample
resolution. See right.
Scaled horizontally
Positioned horizontally
The Resolution knob sets the record length. (See

discussion on page 317.)
Push Set to 50% if required to stabilize display.
39
Acquiring Waveforms
Overview
Continue with 6.
the acquisition
setup
To finish the acquisition setup, you must set the

acquisition mode and start the acquisition.
See To Set Up Acquisition Controls on page 323.
For more help H
For more information on the controls described in this

procedure, push the Vertical or Horizontal MENU
button. Click the HELP button in the setup dialog box
that displays.
End of Procedure
310
Acquiring Waveforms
To Autoset the Instrument
Overview
With an input signal connected, use the procedure that follows to autoset based
on the characteristics of the input signal. Autoset operates on the selected
channel only.
To autoset
Prerequisites 1.
2.
Execute 3.
Control elements and resources

in place. Signals must be connected to channels. A
triggering source must be provided.
At least one channel must be turned on (its front-panel
button lighted).
See the sampling-module user manuals for help with

installing sampling modules. See page 345 in this
manual for trigger setup information.
Push the Autoset button to to execute an autoset on the

selected waveform.
If you use Autoset when one or more channels are
displayed, the instrument uses the selected channel for
horizontal scaling. Vertically, all channels in use are
individually scaled.
Note. Autoset can execute on live waveforms (either
channel or math) in the Main time base.
Define 4.
Click Define Autoset in the Utilities menu to display

the Autoset properties dialog box. To change the autoset
criteria, select from:
H
Edge to setup for best display of the waveform

edge
Period to set up for best display of a waveform

period
Bit/Eye Pattern to optimize for eye pattern display
Click OK to set Autoset to use the current criteria. To

execute, repeat step 3, above.
For More 5.
Information

procedure, push/click the HELP button in any dialog
box or select Help Contents and Index in the Help
menu.
End of Procedure
311
Acquiring Waveforms
NOTE. Autoset sets the vertical position to zero and adjusts the vertical offset to
center the signal in the display.
If a standard mask is active for the selected waveform, Autoset adjusts the
selected waveform record to match the mask, if possible. Autoset adjusts the
vertical scale and offset, horizontal scale, position, and reference parameters as
required for the mask standard.
To Reset the Instrument
Overview
You may want to revert to the factory default setup; if so, use the following
procedure to reset the instrument:
To reset to factory defaults
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument is powered on and running.
See Power On Instrument on page 112.
Execute 2.
Push the Default Setup button.
End of Procedure
Signal Conditioning
Background
This section contains background information that can help you more effectively
set up the acquisition window of each channel.
Input. This instrument samples sequentially, in order to provide superior
bandwidth and time resolution. Sequential sampling systems sample the input
without scaling it (they have a fixed dynamic range); therefore, input protection
and dynamic range are necessarily limited.
CAUTION. Do not overdrive the inputs. Also observe static-safe procedures and
cautions as outlined in the sampling-module user manual. Sampling modules are
very sensitive to ESD.
312
Acquiring Waveforms
Autoset Considerations. Autoset acquires samples from the input signal and
attempts to take the following actions based on the input data:
H
Evaluate the amplitude range of the input signals and offset of the vertical
acquisition window to acquire the signal without clipping.
Set the trigger level to the approximate midlevel of the trigger signal being
applied (either an external trigger or a clock-recovery trigger).
Evaluate the signal transitions and set the horizontal scale to produce a
waveform display based on the Autoset mode selected: Edge, Period, or
Bit/Eye Pattern.
Sometimes Autoset cannot produce a correct display due to the nature of the
input signal; if so, you may have to adjust the scale, trigger, and acquisition
controls manually. Some conditions that can cause Autoset to fail are:
H
no signal present.
signals with extreme or variable duty cycles.
signals with multiple or unstable signal periods.
signals with too low amplitude.
no recognizable trigger signal.
no eye diagram waveform present when autosetting in Bit/Eye Pattern

autoset mode.
Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations. The size of the vertical acquisition

window is determined by the operating range of the the sampling module and
any probe connected to it. The vertical offset determines where the vertical
window is positioned relative to ground. Parts of the signal amplitude that fall
within the vertical window are acquired; parts outside (if any) are not (they are
clipped).
As an example, consider that a basic 80E00-series sampling module, with a
maximum 100 mV/div scale, covers 1 volt over 10 divisions. Changing the
vertical scale setting only changes how much of the vertical window displays on
screen; changing vertical position simply changes the space on the screen where
the data is displayed.
You can set the vertical scale, position, and offset of each channel independently
of other channels.
313
Acquiring Waveforms
The vertical scale and position controls do not affect the vertical acquisition
window, rather they adjust the display system to display the waveform as
follows:
H
The vertical scale (per division) setting determines the portion of the vertical
acquisition window that appears in the graticule, allowing you to scale it to
contain all of the window or only part. Figure 32 shows two vertical
acquisition windows that contain the entire waveform, but only one window
contains the entire waveform in the graticule on screen.
a. Volts/Div setting determines the size of the display graticule within the vertical
acquisition window (scale set to 50 mv/div.)
+0.50 volt
Vertical window
+0.25 volt
C1
Graticule
0.25 volt
0.50 volt
b. Vertical position can change location of display graticule within +/5 divisions
(position set to 4 divisions)
+0.50 volt
+0.45 volt
Vertical window
Graticule
C1
0.05 volt
0.5 volt
Figure 32: Setting vertical scale and position of input channels
314
Acquiring Waveforms
NOTE. Amplitude-related automatic measurements (for example, peak-to-peak

and RMS) will be accurate for vertical windows like those shown in
Figure 32 a and b on page 314 because neither waveform is clipped (that is,
both waveforms are acquired). But if the signal amplitude were to extend outside
the vertical acquisition window, the data acquired becomes clipped. Clipped
data causes inaccurate results if used in amplitude-related automatic measurements. Clipping also causes inaccurate amplitude values in waveforms that are
stored or exported for use in other programs.
H
The vertical position adjusts the display of the graticule relative to the
vertical acquisition window (position is a display control). Figure 32 b
shows how vertical position moves the waveform graticule vertically in the
vertical acquisition window to place the acquired waveform in the graticule
display. Position does not determine what data is acquired as does vertical
offset.
The vertical offset control affects the vertical acquisition window and the
displayed waveform as follows:
H
The vertical range (window) is always centered around the offset value that
is set. Vertical offset is the voltage level at middle of the vertical acquisition
window. With no (zero) offset (see Figure 33), that voltage level is zero
(ground).
As you vary vertical offset, the middle voltage level moves relative to zero.
This moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the waveform.
With input signals that are smaller than the window, it appears the waveform
moves in the window. Actually, a larger signal shows what really happens:
the offset moves the middle of the vertical acquisition window up and down
on input signal. Figure 33 shows how offset moves the acquisition window
to control the portion of the waveform amplitude the window captured.
Applying a negative offset moves the vertical range down relative to the DC
level of the input signal, moving the waveform up on the display. Likewise,
applying a positive offset moves the vertical range up, moving the waveform
down on the display. See Figure 33.
NOTE. On screen, the channel icon in the waveform bar points to the offset value
around which the vertical acquisition window is centered. The offset value
pointed to is relative to the ground reference icon. Both icons are shown in
Figure 33.
315
Acquiring Waveforms
Vertical window = 1 V peak-to-peak (fixed by sampling module used)
Offset +300 mV
(Near waveform top level)
C1
Offset 0.0 V
(At waveform ground reference)
C1
Offset 300 mV
(Waveform bottom level)
C1
Acquisition window shifts

positive to capture overshoot
Acquisition window shifts

negative to capture preshoot
Figure 33: Varying offset positions vertical acquisition window on waveform

amplitude
NOTE. Measurements use the entire portion of the waveform that the vertical
window captures, not only the portion displayed on screen. Also, waveforms
exported or saved (from the File menu or over the GPIB) contain data from the
entire vertical window, not just the on-screen portion.
Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations.You define the horizontal

acquisition window, that is, you set several parameters that determine the
segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record when
acquired. (For background, please read Waveform Record on page 327.) These
common parameters specify a common horizontal acquisition window that is
316
Acquiring Waveforms
applied to all channels in parallel. (See Independent vs. Shared Window on

page 319.) These parameters are:
H
The external trigger signal that you input and set the trigger system to
recognize determines the point relative to the input waveform that triggers
the instrument.
The horizontal position you set determines the horizontal delay from the
trigger point to the first sample point in the acquisition window.
The horizontal scale you set, and the requirement that all waveforms fit
within the 10 horizontal-division display, determines the horizontal duration
of the window relative to any waveform, allowing you to scale it to contain a
waveform edge, a cycle, or several cycles.
Horizontal position
Sample interval
First sampled and
digitized point
Trigger event on
Ext. trigger signal
Horizontal
acquisition
window
Horizontal
delay
Time of first point
Figure 34: Horizontal acquisition window definition

H
The record length (along with the horizontal scale) you set for the 10-division window determines the sample interval (horizontal point spacing or
resolution) on the waveform.
NOTE. The horizontal position controls the distance to the Horizontal Reference
to indirectly set the time to the first sampled point. See Horizontal Position and
the Horizontal Reference on page 353 for a discussion of this relationship.
Horizontal Scale vs. Record Length vs. Sample Interval vs. Resolution. These
parameters all relate to each other and specify the horizontal acquisition window.
317
Acquiring Waveforms
Because the horizontal acquisition window must fit in the 10 horizontal division
display, for most cases, you just set the duration of the horizontal acquisition
window (10 divs x the scale setting) as described in (1) below. By also setting a
record length in samples, you indirectly set the resolution/sample interval/sample
rate for the horizontal acquisition window (waveform record). The relations
between these horizontal elements follow:
1. Time Duration (seconds) = 10 divs (window size) x Horizontal Scale
(sec/div)
2. Time Duration (seconds) = Sample Interval (seconds/sample) x Record
Length (samples),
where:
Time Duration is the horizontal acquisition window time duration
3.
Sample Interval (sec/sample) = Resolution (sec/sample) = 1/Sample Rate

(samples/sec)
In (2) above, note that it is Sample Interval that varies indirectly to accommodate
the window time duration (and its scale setting) and the Record Length setting as
these later two elements can be set by you. These elements behave as follows:
H
If Record Length or Time Duration vary, Sample Interval varies to accommodate, up to highest sample rate/lowest sample interval/highest resolution.
If you set faster Horizontal Scale settings, decreasing Time Duration, and the
Sample Interval reaches its lower limit, the horizontal scale becomes limited
to a setting compatible with the record length and the lower limit of the
sample interval.
If you attempt to set longer Record Lengths and the Sample Interval reaches
it lower limit, Time Duration remains constant and the record length
becomes limited. The equation becomes:
Maximum Record Length = Time Duration B Min Sample Interval
For example, at 1ps/div and 10 divisions, the record length must be no more
than 1000 points:
Max Rec Length 1000 samples = (10 divs x 1ps/div) B 0.01 ps/sample
Max Rec Length = 1000 samples
NOTE. Resolution and the equivalent elements, sample interval and sample rate
(see equation 3 above), are not settable directly, but are derived. You can,
however, check the resolution at anytime in the resolution readout (push the
Horizontal Menu button). Also note, that the Resolution knob actually adjusts
the record length to increase sample density (detail).
318
Acquiring Waveforms
Independent vs. Shared Window. For a given time base, the instrument applies the
same horizontal acquisition window to all channels from which it acquires data.
Unlike the vertical acquisition window that you set independently for each
channel, the same time/division, resolution (record length), and horizontal delay
(from the same trigger point) that you set for a time base, apply to all channels in
that time base. In other words, one trigger, from a single trigger source, will
locate a common horizontal acquisition window on all active channels, which
you can shift by setting the horizontal position control.
The horizontal acquisition window determines the waveform records extracted
from all signals present at all active channels and math waveforms. You can
think of the horizontal acquisition window as cutting across any input signals
present in the input channels to extract the same slice of time into waveform
records. See Figure 35.
Common record start

point and record length
Common trigger
Common horizontal
delay
Ch1 record
Ch2 record
Ch3 record
Ch4 record
Figure 35: Common trigger, record length, and acquisition rate for all channels
Setting Acquisition Controls

This section overviews the instrument acquisition featuresthose that start and
stop acquisitions and those that control how the instrument processes the data as
it is acquired (just sampled, or averaged or enveloped). Special features, keys to
using, and operation controls are covered.
319
Acquiring Waveforms
Vertical
Offset
Acquisition
Mode
Acquisition
system
Sampling
module
Time bases
Horizontal
Scale
Why Use?
Whats Special?
Horizontal
Position
Record
Length
Use the acquisition controls to optimize and tailor the acquisition of your
waveforms. The mode controls described here operate on the data as the
instrument acquires itperhaps to reduce noise in the waveform record or to
capture a record of min/max values for each data point in the waveform record.
The acquisition controls also let you start and stop acquisition, as well as take
certain actions after acquisition stops, such as to print the acquired waveform.
Stop After Options. You can set the condition upon which acquisition stops, such
as after a number of acquisitions or a number of mask hits you specify. You can
set the instrument to save waveforms or print the screen to a file or printer.
FrameScanTM Acquisition. You can alter the normal acquisition cycle to produce a
waveform record suitable for acquiring and analyzing Pseudo-Random Bit
Streams (PRBSs), which are contained within a repeating data frame. See
FrameScan Acquisitions on page 329 for more information on using FrameScan
acquisitions.
Whats Excluded?
Envelope acquisition mode can not be used with FrameScan acquisitions; you
must use Sample or Average modes.
Keys to Using
The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the
acquisition system so the waveforms acquired best fit your requirements.
Acquisition Modes. Consider the mode you want to use to acquire data:
H
320
Sample - the instrument does no post-processing of acquired samples.
Acquiring Waveforms
Average - the instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify

into the acquired waveform, creating a running exponential average of the
input signal.
Envelope - the instrument retains the running minimum (Min) and maximum
(Max) values in adjacent sample intervals continuously, as subsequent
waveforms are acquired, creating an envelope of all waveforms acquired for
that channel.
Acquiring and displaying a noisy square wave signal illustrates the difference
between the three modes. Note how Average reduces the noise while Envelope
captures its extremes:
Sample
Average
Envelope
Acquisition Control. Also, consider how you want to control acquisition; you
have two main options, either settable from the Acquisition Setup dialog box
(push Acquisition MENU to display):
H
Run/Stop Button Only - sets the instrument to start and stop the acquisition
only when you use the Run/Stop button, which is available on the front
panel, on the application toolbar, and in the Acquisition Setup dialog box. If
toggled to Run, acquisition will start if a valid trigger occurs. If toggled to
Stop, acquisition stops immediately.
Condition - in addition to Run/Stop Button, which can always stop

acquisition, the stop-after control provides additional conditions you can
select from to stop an acquisition. See step 4, Set the Stop Mode and Action,
on page 324, or access the online help in the Acquisition Setup dialog box
for more information.
Global Controls. Like the horizontal controls, the acquisition controls apply to all
active channels. For example, channel 1 cannot acquire in Sample mode while
channel 2 acquires in Envelope mode; you cannot stop channel 8 from acquiring
(if turned on) while other channels continue to acquire. Unlike horizontal
controls, acquisition settings extend across time bases: you cannot set a different
sample mode for channels acquired in the Mag1 time base; the sample mode you
set extends across the Main, Mag1 and Mag2 time bases.
321
Acquiring Waveforms
Preventing Aliasing. Under certain conditions, a waveform may be aliased on

screen. Read the following description about aliasing and the suggestions for
preventing it.
When a waveform aliases, it appears on screen with a frequency lower than that
of the input signal or it appears unstable even though the TRIGD light is lit.
Aliasing occurs because the instrument sample interval is too long to construct
an accurate waveform record. (See Figure 36.)
Actual High-Frequency Waveform

Apparent Low-frequency
Waveform Due to Aliasing
Sampled Points
Figure 36: Aliasing

Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing. To quickly check for aliasing, slowly
adjust the horizontal scale to a faster time per division setting. If the shape of the
displayed waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base
setting, your waveform was probably aliased. You can also try pressing the
AUTOSET button to eliminate aliasing.
To avoid aliasing, be sure to set resolution so that the instrument samples the
input signal at a rate more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component.
For example, a signal with frequency components of 500 MHz would need to be
sampled with a sample interval less than 1 nanosecond to represent it accurately
and to avoid aliasing.
322
Acquiring Waveforms
To Set Acquisition Modes
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to set the data-acquisition mode and specify
acquisition start and stop methods. For more detailed information, display online
help when performing the procedure.
To set acquisitions modes
Prerequisites 1.
Instrument must be installed with sampling modules in

place before powering on the instrument. Instrument
must be powered up, with horizontal and vertical
controls setup. Triggering should also be set up.
See the sampling-module user manuals for sampling

module installation. See page 345 for trigger setup.
To select an 2.
acquisition Mode
Push the Acquisition MENU button to display the Acq

Setup dialog box.
Select the 3.
acquisition Mode
Click an option button to select the acquisition mode;

choose from the following modes:
Set a
sample count
Sample
Average
Envelope
For Average mode only, enter the number of samples to

to average in the Average box.
323
Acquiring Waveforms
Overview
To set acquisitions modes
Set the Stop 4.

mode and action
Under Stop After, click one of the following options:

H
Run/Stop Button Only
Condition
5.
If you selected Condition, choose a condition from the

drop-down list, such as Number of Acquisitions or
Mask Total Hits, to stop on. If the condition requires a
count (count box is enabled), enter a count.
6.
Select a Stop After action from the drop-down list box.

Choose from the following actions:
H
None
Print Screen to File
Print Screen to Printer
Save all Waveforms
Enter a filename for saving to if youve selected Print to

File or Save all Waveforms.
7.
Start acquisition 8.
Click to check Ring Bell if you want audio notice when

acquisition stops.
Push the RUN/STOP front-panel button to begin

acquiring.
See To Start and Stop Acquisition on page 325.
End of Procedure
324
Acquiring Waveforms
To Start and
Stop Acquisition
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to start and stop acquisition.
To start and stop acquisition
Prerequisites 1.
Instrument must be installed with sampling modules in

place before powering on the instrument. Instrument
must be powered up, with horizontal and vertical
controls set up. Triggering should also be set up.
See sampling-module user manuals for sampling

module installation. See page 323 for acquisition
setup and page 345 for trigger setup in this manual.
To start 2.
acquiring
Make sure all the channels to be acquired are turned on

(use the channel buttons; see page 38 if needed).
Then push the RUN/STOP button to begin acquiring.
To stop 3.
acquiring
Push the RUN/STOP button to stop acquisition.

Acquisition will also stop when acquisition finishes if a
selected stop condition is satisfied (see step 4 on
page 324) or if triggering ceases while in Normal
trigger mode.
To clear an 4.
acquisition
Push the Acquisition CLEAR DATA button to discard the

acquired data in all channels.
For more 5.
information

procedure, push the Acquisition MENU button. Click the
HELP button in the setup dialog box that displays.
Also, see references listed at right.
See To Set Up Acquisition Modes on page 323.
End of Procedure
Acquisition Control Background

This section contains background information on the data sampling and
acquisition process that can help you more effectively setup the acquisition
window of each channel. This section:
H
describes the acquisition hardware.
325
Acquiring Waveforms
Acquisition Hardware
defines the sampling process, sampling modes, and the waveform record.
describes the acquisition cycle in Normal and FrameScan modes.
Before a signal can be acquired, it must pass through the input channel where it
is sampled and digitized. Each channel has a dedicated sampler and digitizer as
shown in Figure 37; each channel can produce a stream of digital data from
which waveform records can be extracted. See Signal Connection and Scaling on
page 34 for further description of scaling, positioning, and DC offsetting of
channels.
Number of channels depends on sampling modules installed
CH 1
Sampler
Digitizer
CH 2
Sampler
Digitizer
Sampling module
Instrument
CH 3
Sampler
Digitizer
CH n
Sampler
Digitizer
Sampling module
Instrument
Figure 37: Channel configuration
Sampling Process
326
Acquisition is the process of sampling an analog input signal of an input

channel, converting it into digital data, and assembling it into a waveform
record, which is then stored in acquisition memory. Sampling, then, is the
process that provides one sample per trigger event and, when taken from
repeated trigger events, also provides the digitized signal data from which the
instrument assembles the waveform record (see Figure 39 on page 328). The
signal parts within the vertical range of the sampler are digitized. See
Figure 38.
Acquiring Waveforms
+0.5 V
0V
Input signal
Sampled points
+0.5 V
0V
0V
0.5 V
Digital values
0V
0.5 V
Figure 38: Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing
Sampling Modes
Waveform Record
The instrument acquisition system can process the data as it is acquired,

averaging or enveloping the waveform data to produce enhanced waveform
records. Once the waveform record exists (enhanced or not), you can use the
post-processing capabilities of the instrument to further process that record:
perform measurements, waveform math, mask tests, and so on. Refer to Keys to
Using on page 320 for description of all three acquisition modes.
While sampling the input signal provides the data that makes up the waveform
record for any given channel, the instrument builds the waveform record through
use of some common parameters (common means they affect the waveforms in
all channels).
Figure 39 shows how these common parameters define the waveform record; as
shown in the figure, they define where in the data stream data is taken and how
much data is taken. Locate the following parameters in the figure:
H
Sample Interval. The precise time between sample points taken during
acquisition.
Record Length. The number of samples required to fill a waveform record.
Trigger Point. The trigger point marks the time zero in a waveform record.
All waveform samples are located in time with respect to the trigger point.
Horizontal Delay. The time lapse from the trigger point to the first sample
taken (first point in the waveform record). It is set indirectly by setting the
horizontal position (see Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on
page 353).
327
Acquiring Waveforms
Sample interval
First sampled and

digitized point
Waveform record acquired
over many acquisitions,
1 sample per acquisition
Recurring trigger events

from trigger signal
Record length
Horizontal delay
Figure 39: The waveform record and its defining parameters

As Figure 39 shows, the instrument acquires points in order from left to right,
with each point from a separate trigger event, and delayed from that event by:
horizontal delay + (sample interval x (sample number 1))
When all the points in the waveform record have been sampled and digitized, the
waveform record is in acquisition memory and becomes available for display (or
use in math waveforms, storing, exporting, and elsewhere). See Acquisition
Cycle, which follows.
For a control-oriented discussion of the waveform record, see:
Acquisition Cycle
328
Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 316.
Horizontal Scale vs. Record Length vs. Sample Interval vs. Resolution on
page 317.
The process of building a record is a subpart the acquisition cycle, which

describes how the instrument cycles through recognizing a trigger, taking a
sample and processing it according to sample mode, and adding it to a waveform
record. This manual describes the normal acquisition cycle in Process Overview
Map on page 26. Note the following points regarding acquisition cycles:
H
A waveform record exists, either on display or as an icon on the waveform

bar, until it is replaced by a more recent acquisition or until you clear the
record. The process of clearing waveform records is described on page 325.
Choose the FrameScan cycle when you want to test for anomalies in
Pseudo-Random Bit Streams. See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 329.
Acquiring Waveforms
FrameScan Acquisitions
This instrument can modify its normal acquisition process to help you analyze
pattern-dependent failures in high bit-rate communications signals.
Why Use?
FrameScan acquisitions allow detailed display and analysis of individual,

complete waveforms or of the bit sequences leading up to a failure. This ability
to identify the specific patterns that caused the failures makes using FrameScan
mode superior to traditional methods. Traditional methods include:
H
creating an eye diagram, which is a statistical representation of signal, using

clock-triggered sampling oscilloscope.
bit-error testing to find the total number of errors in a frame.
These methods are time consuming to use and neither can examine in detail the
pattern driving the failure.
Whats Special?
FrameScan acquisition mode offers the following advantages.

Breakthrough time base stability. Timing accuracy varies no more than 0.1 part
per million from trigger event to data point, providing the stability needed to
examine signals of almost any length for pattern-dependent failures.
Flexible set-up support. Set bit rates manually or set a bit rate based on a
communication standard. Then set the horizontal scale manually or invoke a
custom autoset: Bit/Eye-Pattern Autoset, if you have set an independent bit rate,
or Standard-Mask Autoset, if you set bit rate based on a communication
standard.
Identification and analysis of pattern-dependent failures. FrameScan acquisition,
when used with mask testing and Stop After condition acquisition, can automatically determine the bit at which a pattern-dependent failure occurred.
Improved noise resolution on low-power communication signals. The instrument
can use Average acquisition mode on Eye diagrams when acquiring using
FrameScan mode. Averaging provides the noise resolution that the examination
of many of todays low-power communication signals can require. FrameScan
mode results in sequentially acquired data which can be averaged; normal eye
diagrams acquire data randomly and cannot be averaged. Compare the noise of
the waveforms that follow. The right waveform is averaged; the left is not.
329
Acquiring Waveforms
Whats Excluded?
The instrument must be in Average or Sample acquisition modes; FrameScan

excludes Envelope acquisition mode.
Keys to Using
The key points that follow describe FrameScan mode operating behavior and
provide background to help you to use this feature.
Determine Start Bit and Scan Bits. You need to know the bit in the bit stream at
which you want to start the scan, the appropriate horizontal scale, the starting
horizontal position, and the total number of bits for the desired FrameScan cycle.
How FrameScan Mode Acquires. FrameScan mode alters the normal acquisition
sequence in order to scan a pseudo-random bit sequence (PRBS) or another
repetitive bit stream to acquire one bit at time in the same sequence found in the
bit stream:
H
Triggering is synchronous with the bit streams (framing signal) of the

communication signal you want to scan, which results in the acquisition of a
single sample prior the scanning of the next bit. You must supply an external
trigger source that is synchronous with the frame; possible sources are
external frame trigger/sync signals from a pattern generator or from a BERT
(Bit Error Rate Tester).
Acquisition operates in a scanning mode, where:

a. horizontal position is set to acquire the first bit, which the acquisition
system acquires as a subframe (see Figure 310 on page 331).
b. horizontal position is incremented one-bit period (1/bit rate), and then
the acquisition system acquires the second bit as a subframe. The
duration of each subframe acquisition is set to provide about a 20%
overlap between frames.
c. This sequence of incrementing, and then acquiring the next bit,
continues until the instrument acquires the number of bits you specify
330
Acquiring Waveforms
for the frame, or until acquisition stops due to a specific test condition,
such as the failure of a mask test.
The resulting horizontally skewed FrameScan acquisitions display successive
individual bits acquired in increasing time order. FrameScan acquisitions can
continue through an entire frame of data if needed to help you to uncover faulty
bit sequences leading up to pattern-dependent failures.
Subframe 1
Subframe 3
Subframe 2
h
Subframe 1
Subframe 4
h
Subframe 2
Subframe 5
Subframe 3
Subframe 4
Subframe 5
Accumulated
acquisitions
Notes:
h is the horizontal position change = one bit period (=1/bit-rate)
Subframe acquisition duration is 40% greater than the bit period
Figure 310: How FrameScan acquisition works (scanning on a 127bit PRBS

shown)
331
Acquiring Waveforms
To Acquire in
FrameScan Mode
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to set up the instrument to acquire in FrameScan
mode.
To acquire in FrameScan mode
Prerequisites 1.
2.
The instrument must have an appropriate sampling

module in place before powering on the instrument.
Instrument must be powered up.
The signal to be scanned must be input to a channel
and an appropriate external framing signal must be
applied to the trigger input.
3.
The acquisition mode must be set to Sample or

Average. Envelope cannot be used with FrameScan
acquisitions.
4.
The vertical and horizontal controls and triggering must

be set to acquire the signal.
Access the 5.
FrameScan
controls
From the application menu bar, select Setup, and then

select Horizontal. See right.
Set the frame 6.

duration
In the Horz Setup dialog box, click the Units Bits option
button.
7.
Enter the total number of bits you wish to scan (the

frame duration) in the Scan Bits box. You must always
set this parameter manually.
See sampling-module user manuals for

sampling module installation.
See page 323 for acquisition setup and

page 345 for trigger setup in this manual.
Check for bits units
Tip. You can set Units to Seconds if you prefer, but

Bits usually makes the set up and use of FrameScan
acquisition easier.
Enter bits to be scanned
332
Acquiring Waveforms
Overview
To acquire in FrameScan mode (Cont.)
Set the bit rate 8.
Set the horizontal scale so one acquisition record is

equal to one bit. Use one of the two methods that follow:
H
Set the starting 9.

horizontal position
Automatic: If your signal to be scanned matches a

communications standard, select it from the Comm
Standard list. Choosing a standard sets the bit rate
and start bit; otherwise, if you know the bit rate, you
can set the bit rate manually using the Bit Rate
box.
Manual: Adjust the Scale control to a setting that
results in a display of both edges of the bit. For
example, setting 1/8 of a bit per division (0.125
bits/div) yields 1 bit in 8 divisions, which fits nicely
on screen.
Select a
comm. standard, or...
Set the bit rate
manually
Set to 1/8 bit

per division
Set the initial horizontal position to the first bit you want
to acquire. Use one of the two methods that follow:
H
Automatic: Enter your desired start bit location, and

then check the Auto Position box to enable the
instrument to set the position as near as possible to
match the bit specified in the Start Bit box.
Manual: Adjust the Position control to align the
start of a bit to desired location in the frame.
Tip. The later method is useful when you need to

manually align a bit or waveform to a mask on the
display.
Enable 10. In the dialog box, click to check the FrameScan

FrameScan
Enabled box. See right.
11. To restart the scan at the first bit at any time, click the
Reset button.
First set the

start bit, ...
and then enable
Auto Position
Or set manually
Check to
start scan
Click to
restart scan
333
Acquiring Waveforms
Overview
To acquire in FrameScan mode (Cont.)
Set a display 12. If you want to display the frame-scanned acquisition as

mode
an eye diagram, set one of the following display modes:
H
Select Infinite Persistence or Variable Persistence in the Display Setup dialog box (from the
application menu bar, select Setup, and then
select Display).
Right click the waveform icon (left side of the

screen in the waveform bar) of the waveform being
scanned and select Color Grade in the menu.
For more 13. For more help on FrameScan acquisitions, click the
information
Help button in the Setup dialog box to access
contextual help on screen.
See page 3145 to learn about using online help.
334
Acquiring Waveforms
To Catch a Bit Error
Overview
FrameScan Acquisition, when coupled with mask testing, provides the tool you
need to capture a defective bit and examine the pattern leading up to it.
To catch a bit error
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument should be set up per the previous

procedure.
2.
Pause the acquisition system (push the Run/Stop

button on the front-panel).
3.
Infinite persistence and color grading display modes

should be off if turned on in the previous procedure.
Enable 4.
mask testing

select Mask. (See right.)
5.
Use the Mask Setup dialog box to set up for mask

testing as you would for nonFrameScan acquisitions.
See Using Mask Testing on page 3123 for information
about using Mask testing. Be sure to enable the mask.
See To Acquire in FrameScan Mode

page 332.
Tip. If you selected a communication standard when you

set the FrameScan bit rate (see step 8 on page 333),
the same standard will be preselected in the Mask
Setup dialog box.
335
Acquiring Waveforms
Overview
To catch a bit error (Cont.)
Set conditional 6.
acquisition and
start testing
7.
8.
For more 9.
information

select Acquisition.
In the Acq Setup dialog box (see right), check the
Condition option under Stop After.
In the Condition pulldown list, select Mask Total Hits
and set a count of one in the count box. These settings
will stop acquisition on a violation of any of the masked
areas on screen. See below.
For more help on using FrameScan acquisitions, click

the Help button in the Horz Setup dialog box to
display contextual help on screen.
End of Procedure
336
Triggering
To properly acquire waveforms to sample a signal and assemble it into a
waveform record you need to set up the instrument trigger conditions. This
section provides an overview of the instrument trigger features and their use.
Sampling
module
Acquisition
system
Trigger
system
Time base
system
Signal processing
& transformation
system
Output and
storage
User Interface
and display
Edge Triggering
The instrument supports direct-edge triggering, which triggers as described in
Keys to Using on page 337. You must provide an external trigger source, except
when using clock-recovery triggering from an optical sampling module equipped
with the clock-recovery option or using the internal clock (as when TDR testing).
Why Use?
Use triggering controls to control the acquisition window, so that the instrument
acquires the waveform data you want. The trigger event, when synchronized to
the input signal, defines the horizontal acquisition window. By choosing the
trigger event and adjusting the horizontal position (delay between trigger event
and the horizontal reference point, you control the location in the data stream
(the input signal) that the waveform record is taken).
Whats Special?
Clock Recovery. If you use optical sampling modules that include a clock-recovery option, you can use the clock embedded in certain optical signals to trigger
the instrument.
Keys to Using
The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up to
trigger on your waveforms.
Triggering Process. When a trigger event occurs, the instrument acquires a
sample in the process of building a waveform record. The trigger event esta-
337
Triggering
blishes the time-zero point in the waveform record and all samples are measured
with respect to that event.
The trigger event starts waveform acquisition. A trigger event occurs when the
trigger source (the signal that the trigger circuit monitors) passes through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction (the trigger slope). When a trigger
event occurs, the instrument acquires one sample of the input signal. When the
next trigger event occurs, the instrument acquires the next sample. This process
continues until the entire record is filled with acquired samples. Without a
trigger, the instrument does not acquire any samples. See Figure 39 on
page 328. This behavior differs from that of real time acquisition systems,
which can acquire a complete waveform record from a single trigger event.
Triggering is Global. The instrument uses the trigger event to acquire across all
active channels. This same trigger is also common across all time bases currently
active (one or more of Main, Mag1 and Mag2).
Edge-Trigger Type. This instrument supports edge triggering only, in which edge
triggers gate a series of acquisitions.
The slope control determines whether the instrument recognizes the trigger point
on the rising or the falling edge of a signal. See Figure 311.You can set the
trigger slope from the toolbar at the top of the display or in the Trigger Setup
dialog box.
The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs. The
instrument lets you set the trigger level from the front panel with the Trigger
LEVEL knob.
Positive-going edge
Negative-going edge
Trigger level
can be adjusted
vertically.
Trigger slope can be positive or negative, with

trigger point occurring on the slope specified.
Figure 311: Slope and level define the trigger event
338
Triggering
Trigger Modes. The trigger modes control the behavior of the instrument when
not triggered:
H
Normal mode sets the instrument to acquire a waveform only when

triggered. Normal mode does not acquire data if triggering stops, rather the
last waveform records acquired remains frozen on the display (if the
channels containing them are displayed). If no last waveform exists, none is
displayed. See Figure 312, Normal trigger mode.
Auto mode sets the instrument to acquire a waveform even if a trigger event
does not occur. Auto mode uses a timer that starts after trigger rearm. If the
trigger circuit does not detect a trigger after this timeout (about 100 ms), it
auto triggers, forcing enough trigger events to acquire all active channels. In
the case of repetitive acquisitions in automatic trigger mode, waveform
samples are acquired, but at different places in the data stream (synchronization is lost). See Figure 312, Automatic trigger mode. If you do not apply a
signal to any channel displayed, a baseline is displayed for that channel.
Triggered waveform
Untriggered waveforms
Normal trigger mode
Automatic trigger mode
Figure 312: Triggered versus untriggered displays

Trigger Sources. The trigger source provides the signal that the trigger system
monitors. The source can be:
H
the internal clock of the instrument (TDR clock rate), with user-selectable
clock frequencies. The Internal Clock Out connector supplies a replica of the
internal clock at the instrument front panel. See Figure 313 on page 340.
an external signal coupled to one of the trigger input connectors (see

Figure 313) on the front panel:
External Direct, DC coupled and usable with signals up to at least

3.0 GHz
External Prescale, divided by 8 and usable with signals up to at least

12.5 GHz
an internal clock-recovery trigger provided by an optical sampling module

equipped with the clock-recovery option. Clock recovery is user-selectable
for triggering rates that depend on the sampling module used; for example,
339
Triggering
either 622 Mbps (OC-12/STM-4 standards) or 2.488 Gbps (OC-48/STM-16

standards) for the 80C01-CR Optical Sampling Module.
Internal Clock Output
Trigger
Prescale
Input
Trigger
Direct
Input
Trigger
Probe
Power
Figure 313: Trigger inputs

Use a trigger source that is synchronized with the signal you are sampling and
displaying. Selection of your trigger source depends on your application, as
shown in Table 31.
Table 31: Application-based triggering
Application
Source to use
Communications (optical) data Set source to Clock Recovery, and set the clock-recovery type,
signals with embedded clock
and use an optical sampling module equipped with a
clock-recovery option supporting the recovery of the clock
signal.
340
TDR measurement using an

electrical sampling module
equipped with TDR
Set source to Internal Clock to use the internal clock of the

instrument (TDR clock), and select the appropriate clock
frequency. Disconnect any signal connected to the External
10MHz Reference Input when using the Internal clock.
Measurements on systems
with a synchronized pretrigger
signal
Set source to External Direct or External Prescaler as

appropriate (see Trigger Source Connectors) and connect the
pretrigger signal.
Triggering
Table 31: Application-based triggering (Cont.)

Application
Source to use
Any application requiring that

the input signal provide the
trigger
Set source to External Direct or External Prescaler as

appropriate (see Trigger Source Connectors). Use a signal
splitter or power divider to couple to both the Ext Direct or
Prescaler input and the input channel, so that the sampled
signal is also the trigger signal.
Any application requiring that

you probe the trigger source
Set source to External Direct, and use a Tektronix probe as

described in Probe-to-Trigger Source Connection on
page 341.
Trigger Source and ESD. Observe static precautions when coupling trigger
sources to this instrument.
CAUTION. Electro-static damage can permanently degrade and damage the
inputs to this instrument, its sampling modules, and accessory probes. You must
take proper precautions; please read your sampling module user manual for
more information.
Trigger Source Connectors. External triggers can be connected to either the
Trigger DIRECT or Trigger PRESCALE connectors on the front panel:
H
Signals connected to the PRESCALE connector are divided by eight and

then fed to the trigger circuits. Although the divide ratio of the prescaler is
fixed at eight, it is randomized to prevent locking onto a particular bit in a
bit stream with a pattern length that is a multiple of eight.
Signals connected to the DIRECT connector are fed directly to the trigger
circuitry. The signal is DC coupled and can be up to 3.0 GHz.
When using a given trigger source, you should disconnect any other trigger
source from the front panel to ensure specified performance. Specifically:
H
Do not connect a signal to the Trigger Direct or Trigger Prescale front-panel

connector unless youve selected that input as the trigger source.
Do not connect a signal to the External 10 MHz Reference front-panel

connector unless you have selected that input as the timebase mode in the
Horizontal setup dialog box.
Probe-to-Trigger Source Connection. You can connect probes, such as the P6207
and P6209, to the Trigger DIRECT input connector of the instrument. Observe
341
Triggering
all static precautions outlined in the documentation for the probe you choose
while following these steps:
H
Connect the probe-power connector to the TEKPROBE- and SMA-compatible probe (Level 1 or 2 only).
Connect the probe signal connector (probe must have an SMA connector) to
the Trigger DIRECT source input (not the PRESCALE source input).
Connect the probe input to the signal that is to supply the trigger source.
The probe you attach preconditions the trigger signal for its input just as other
probes do for the vertical inputs. More specifically, a probe attached to the Trigger
DIRECT input may affect trigger-level range, resolution, and units as follows:
H
Trigger-level units will match those of the probe.
The trigger level for probes that have offset control is adjusted by changing
the offset of the connected probe and is limited by the range, resolution, and
offset characteristics of the probe.
When a connected probe is removed and a different probe installed, the

instrument attempts to keep the same absolute trigger level as the current
trigger-level setting.
Note that the probe parameters (range, resolution, offset scale, and units) that are
relevant to the trigger circuit affect the Trigger Level control.
High Frequency Triggering and Metastability Reject. These two features can help
stabilize triggering:
H
When you enable the High Frequency triggering control, the instrument
increases trigger sensitivity of the trigger circuit by decreasing hysteresis (a
transition or noise band), allowing triggering on higher frequency signals.
When you enable Metastability Reject, the instrument replaces the acquired
sample with a null sample if it detects a potential metastable condition. A
metastable condition occurs when both the trigger input signal and the
holdoff-generated enable signal arrive at the internal trigger recognizer at
virtually the same time.
Adjusting Holdoff. Trigger holdoff can also help stabilize triggering. When you
adjust holdoff, the instrument changes the time it waits before rearming its
trigger circuit after acquiring a sample. Before rearming, the trigger circuitry
cannot recognize when the next trigger conditions are satisfied and so cannot
generate the next trigger event. When the instrument is triggering on undesired
trigger events, such as shown in Figure 314 (top waveform), you adjust holdoff
to obtain stable triggering as shown in Figure 314 (bottom waveform).
342
Triggering
Holdoff
Holdoff
Holdoff
Trigger Level
Indicates trigger points

Holdoff
Holdoff
Holdoff
Holdoff
Trigger Level
At the longer holdoff time for the top waveform, triggering occurs at valid, but undesired, trigger
events. With a shorter holdoff set for the bottom waveform, triggers all occur on the first pulse in the
burst, which results in a stable display.
Figure 314: Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers

Usable Holdoff. The holdoff time the instrument can use varies within limits. The
maximum holdoff the instrument can achieve is the 50 ms specified in Specification on page Table A3 on page A3.
The minimum holdoff used depends on hardware constraints, which do not
change, and certain control settings, which you can control:
H
The instrument hardware constrains the minimum usable holdoff time to the
greater of the trigger-to-end-of-record time or 5 ms.
The trigger-to-end-of-record time (EORT) is the time from the trigger event
to the last sample in the waveform record and is calculated as:
EORT = Horiz. Position + (1 0.01 x Horiz. Ref.) x Time/Div x 10
divisions) + Channel Deskew
For example:
EORT = 6 ms + (10.1(.5) x 1 ms/div x 10 div + 0
= 6 ms + 5 m = 11 ms, when:
Horizontal position = 6 ms
Horizontal Ref = 50%
Time/Division = 1 ms/div
Channel Deskew = 0 (set to minimum)
343
Triggering
In this example, because 11 ms is greater than 5 ms, the current control settings
determine the minimum usable holdoff the instrument can use.
EORT
Trigger point
Time to EORT
Horizontal position
Horizontal
delay
(19 ns min.)
Time
zero
Time of first point
Horizontal
reference point
Time of last point

(EORT)
Figure 315: Trigger to End Of Record Time (EORT)

Requested vs Actual Holdoff. The instrument operates with two holdoff values:
344
Requested the last value requested in the Trigger Setup dialog box. You
can set times from 5 ms - 50 ms, but the time requested becomes the actual
time used only if it meets the requirements just described for Actual.
Otherwise, the holdoff-time value requested is held for later use as described
for Actual.
Actual the holdoff time in effect; that is, the time the instrument is using or
will use when acquiring data. The instrument uses it when the minimum
usable holdoff (determined as described in Usable Holdoff, above) is greater
than the requested value. The instrument will retain and change to the
requested value if the user changes control settings such that the requested
value exceeds the minimum usable holdoff. Actual values can range from
5 ms 55 ms.
Triggering
To Trigger
Overview
Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger
acquisitions.
To trigger
Prerequisites 1.

in place. Acquisition system should be set to Run, and
the vertical and horizontal controls should be set
appropriately for the signal to be acquired.
See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module

installation. See page 323 of this manual for acquisition
setup.
Apply a trigger 2.
signal
Connect the signal to be triggered on using proper

probing/connecting techniques for your application.
Typical approaches include using:
H
External Trigger, Direct or Prescale. Portion of the

input signal coupled to the appropriate input (see
right) using a power divider on input signal.
Internal Clock. No external trigger required.
Clock Recovery. Recovered clock signal obtained

from those optical sampling modules supporting
clock recovery (connection internal through the
sampling module; no external trigger connection
required).
Note. When using any of the above sources, disconnect

any signal connected to the other source trigger and
clock sources. See External 10MHz Reference Input
when using the Internal clock).
See Table 31 on page 340 for more information.
Select source, 3.
slope, and level
Click the Trig Source menu, and select the trigger

source to match your trigger signal in the pull-down
menu (upper right corner of display).
4.
Click the Slope button to toggle to the trigger slope you

want, positive or negative.
5.
Adjust the trigger level using the (Set Level to) 50% button
or the Level list box as show at right, or using those on the
front panel, shown in step 7.
Source Menu
Slope button
Level Controls
345
Triggering
Overview
To trigger (Cont.)
Verify 6.
triggering
Other trigger 7.
parameters
For more 8.
information
When the instrument is triggered, the word Triggered is

displayed in the toolbar on screen. You can use also the
trigger lights to verify triggering status as follows:
H
READY lights when the instrument acquisition

system is running but the trigger system is not
receiving valid trigger events. This includes when
auto triggering in absence of a trigger.
TRIGD lights when the instrument acquisition

system is running and the trigger system is
triggered.
READY and TRIGD are always off if acquisition is

stopped.
If you need to change the trigger mode or other settings,

push the Trigger MENU button to display the Trig Setup
dialog box. From there, you can:
H
Switch between Auto and Normal trigger modes
If you have trouble triggering, you can adjust

holdoff, which may help. For assistance with this
control, see step 8.
You may on occasion want to turn off metastable

rejection; again, see step 8 for more information.
Press the Help button in the Trig Setup dialog box to

access the online assistance specific to triggering
commands. You can also read about key trigger
features in Keys to Using on page 337.
Trigger Menu button
See page 3145 for information on online help.
End of Procedure
346
To make use of the waveforms you acquire, you will often want to display them.
This instrument includes a flexible, customizable display that you can control to
examine and analyze acquired waveforms. This section presents an overview of
display operation in the topics Using the Waveform Display and Customizing the
Display.
Sampling
module
Acquisition
system
Trigger
system
Time base
system
Signal processing
& transformation
system
Output and
storage
User Interface
and display
Using the Waveform Display

The waveform display (see Figure 316) is part of the User Interface (UI)
application. The UI takes up the entire screen of the instrument and the
waveform display takes most of the UI. Some terms that are useful in discussing
the waveform display follow.
347
(2) Graticule
(5) Horizontal reference
(3) Upper limit of graticule
(selected waveform)
(6) Preview mode indicator
(7) Main view

(1) Waveform display
(3) Lower limit of graticule

(selected waveform)
(7) Mag1 view
(4) Horizontal scale readout (selected waveform)
Figure 316: Display elements

(1) Waveform display: the area where the waveforms appear. The display
comprises the time bases and graticules, the waveforms, masks, histograms, and
readouts.
(2) Graticule: a grid marking the display area of a view. Each graticule is
associated with its time base.
(3) Upper and lower amplitude-limits readouts: the upper and lower boundary level
of the graticule for the selected waveform.
(4) Horizontal-scale readout: the horizontal scale of the selected waveform.
(5) Horizontal reference: a control that you can position to set the point around
which channel waveforms expand and contract horizontally on screen as you
change the Horizontal Scale control.
(6) Preview: a status field that indicates when all waveforms are being previewed
(that is, displaying an approximation of the waveforms as they will appear when
acquisition completes). This indicator may appear when you alter acquisition
controls.
(7) Main, Mag1, and Mag2 views: selectable objects displaying on screen in the
display, each with its own display of any waveform that is currently turned on. A
348
view is a representation of a signal on an associated time basethe Main time

base with the Main view, which is always displayed, or one of the two Mag
views, each with its own time base and graticule. The display of the Mag views
can be turned on or off. You can display up to three views on screen (Main plus
Mag1 and Mag2) at the same time.
Touchscreen (not shown): a feature that lets you touch controls on screen to
operate the instrument. See Mouse and Touchscreen Operation on page 353.
Why Use?
Whats Special?
Use display features and controls to view, test, measure, and otherwise analyze
your waveforms.
This instrument provides a robust display. Some features of note follow.
Flexible Display Control. Front-panel knobs and buttons support quick access to
the most often used adjustmentsthose that display, position, and scale
waveforms. Mouse, keyboard, and touchscreen interfaces support complete setup
of all the display parameters.
Multiple Time base Views. Three views, Main, plus Mag1 and Mag2, can be
displayed simultaneously, each with its own time base. Live waveforms are
acquired independently in each time base (C1 in Main is a different waveform
than C1 in Mag1 or Mag2).
All the displayed waveforms appear in each view that you display: if C1 and M1
are displayed in Main, they also appear in Mag1 and Mag2 if you display those
views. Reference waveforms will appear in all views as well, but, since they
have a static time base setting (the time base setting with which they were
saved), they will be identical in all views.
Fast Access to Zoom. Waveform inspection has never been easier. Just click and
drag a box around the feature of interest and it zooms horizontally to fill the
screen, reacquired at a higher resolution.
Preview Mode. The instrument automatically uses a preview display when control
changes initiate reacquisition of waveform data. A preview display shows how
the waveforms will look when acquisition completes. When the instrument
finishes the processing of state changes, it removes the preview and displays the
actual waveforms.
Whats Excluded?
Previewing of changes does not occur when the acquisition system is stopped;
the data will not update on screen until acquisition is restarted.
349
Keys to Using
instrument time base views so that they best support your data-analysis tasks.
Waveform Display. In general, the method of displaying a waveform is to define
the waveform, and then turn it on. Table 32 summarizes this process as it
applies to the different waveforms.
Table 32: Defining and displaying waveforms

Waveform1
To define:
To turn on:
Channel:
C1 C8
Install sampling modules in the instrument

compartments.
Push the Vertical CH button, and then push one of

the numbered buttons 1 8.
Reference:
R1 R8
Define an active reference waveform by:
Defining a reference waveform as is described at left

turns on its display.
H
H
saving a channel, reference, or math waveform

to one of locations R1 R8.
recalling a waveform previously saved to a file
into one of locations R1 R8.
After a waveform is defined, use the Vertical REF

button with the waveform number buttons to turn the
waveform on and off.
Both of these operations can be performed from the

File menu.
Math:
M1 M8
Define a math waveform using existing sources

(channel and reference waveforms, and measurement scalar values).
This operation can be performed by selecting the
Edit menu and then selecting Define Math.
When defining a math waveform, you turn it on in

the Define Math dialog box.
After the waveform is defined, use the Vertical
MATH button with the waveform number buttons to
turn the waveform on and off.
The waveform number buttons affect C1C8, R1R8, or M1M8, depending on the Vertical Source button you push CH,
REF, or MATH.
Operations on Selected Waveforms. In general, the method of adjusting (vertically

scaling, offsetting, position, and so on) is from the front panel: select the
waveform using the Vertical source and waveform selection buttons, and then
adjust it using the Vertical Scale, Offset, and Position knobs.
Table 33 on page 351 summarizes operations you can perform for the three
waveform types.
350
Table 33: Operations performed based on the selected waveform

Control function
Waveform supports?
Operating notes
Ch
Ref
Math
Vertical Scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
Vertical Position
Yes
Yes
Yes
Vertical Offset
Yes
No
No
Horizontal Scale
Yes
No
No
Horizontal Position
Yes
No
No
Horizontal Record Length
Yes
No
No
Automatic Source Selection

for Automatic Measurements
Yes
Yes
Yes
Measurements, if selected from Measurements toolbar, use the

selected waveform as the measurement target.
Automatic Target Selection for

Cursors
Yes
Yes
Yes
If cursors are off, pushing the Cursor button on the front panel turns
cursors on with the selected waveform as their target.
Quick Horizontal Scale Adjust

(Zoom)
Yes
No
No
Dragging a box around a portion of the selected waveform adjusts

horizontal scale to fill the screen with the boxed portion (see
Quick-adjust the time base on page 356).
If more than one time base is displayed, these controls adjust the
selected channel
e waveform
ef rm in all time
me bases.
e .
er
ff e is unavailablee for
f r channel
e waveforms
ef rm displayed
e with rho
r
Vertical
offset
or ohm units.
All channel waveforms are adjusted globally in the selected time base.
ef rm are
re not adjusted
e because
e
e their
e r horizontal
rz
r me er
Math waveforms
parameters
are derived from their sources. Reference waveforms are not adjusted
because
e
e they
e havee ffixed
xe horizontal
rz
parameters
r me er determined
e erm e at thee time
me
the waveform was saved.
Graticules. One graticule is displayed for the Main time base, and an additional
graticule is displayed for each Mag time base that you turn on. Figure 316 on
page 348 shows the elements of the time base graticules; the elements are the
same for each time base displayed.
Using Multiple Views. The methods of displaying (turning on) and selecting any
time base view follow:
H
Turn the view on: Press the Mag1 or Mag2 front-panel button once to turn on
the Mag1 or Mag2 time base. The Main view is always (displayed); you
cannot turn it off. Turning on a time base makes it active (selects it for
adjustment).
Select among displayed views: Press any time base view button to make it
the active, selected time base. The button of the selected view is always lit
amber.
Turn off the selected Mag view: Once selected, press the Mag1 or Mag2
button to turn off the time base. The Main time base becomes the selected
time base.
Operations on the Selected Time Base View. The method of adjusting (horizontal
scaling and positioning, setting resolution/record length, and so on) is from the
front panel: select the time base using the Horizontal time base selection buttons,
351
and then adjust it using the Horizontal Scale, Resolution, and Position knobs.
Only channel waveforms can have their horizontal parameters set directly.
Table 33 shows how horizontal operations relate to the waveform types; the key
points to remember follow:
H
As Table 33 shows, horizontal operations affect all channel waveforms, but

in the selected view only. For example, you can select each time base in turn
and set one horizontal scale for all channel waveforms in the Main view,
another horizontal scale for those in the Mag1 view, and a third for those in
the Mag2 view.
The instrument displays a reference waveform with horizontal settings in

effect at the time it was saved. You cannot adjust these settings; the
instrument disables the horizontal controls when you select a reference
waveform. See Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3108 for more
information on reference waveforms.
The instrument displays a math waveform with the horizontal settings

derived from its math expression. You cannot change these directly; the
instrument disables the horizontal controls when you select a math waveform. See Creating Math Waveforms on page 389 for more information on
math waveforms.
All waveforms in each time base are displayed fit-to-screen; that is, within
the full 10 horizontal divisions that the graticule provides.
Waveform Operations that Cross Time Base Views. Unlike the horizontal controls
just described, some controls apply to all time base views:
H
Turning a waveform on or off in any view displays or removes it from all

views.
Selecting a waveform in any view makes it the selected waveform in all

views; for example, select C1 in Main, and then select Mag1. C1 is the
selected waveform in Mag1. Turn on Mag2, and Mag2 displays on screen
with C1 selected.
Vertical adjustments on a waveform in any time base adjust the waveform in

all time bases.
Display Controls vs. Acquisition Controls. For channel waveforms, the vertical
offset control and the horizontal controls you set adjust the instrument acquisition parameters. See the following descriptions for more information:
352
Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 313
Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 316
Mag1 and Mag2 are Magnifying Timebases. The Mag1 and Mag2 time bases are so
named because they cannot be set to a more coarse (slower) horizontal scale than
that of the Main. When set to a more fine (faster) horizontal scale, they can be
thought of as magnifying a segment of the Main time base. In short:
H
each Mag time base scale sets the size of an aperture on the Main time base.
each Mag time base position setting locates the aperture within the Main
time base.
each Mag time base graticule displays, across its full horizontal width
(10 divisions), the contents of the aperture.
See To Display Waveforms in a Mag View on page 357 for a procedure that
demonstrates this operating characteristic.
Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference. The time values you set for
horizontal position are from the trigger point to the horizontal reference point.
This is not the time from the trigger point to the start of the waveform record
unless you set the horizontal reference to 0%. See Figure 317.
Trigger point
50 ms max.
Horizontal position
Horizontal
delay
(19 ns min.)
Time
zero
Time of first point
Horizontal
reference point
Time of last point
Figure 317: Horizontal position includes time to Horizontal Reference

NOTE. The time from the trigger to the time of the first point sampled is the
horizontal delay. Note that horizontal delay is set indirectly by the horizontal
position and horizontal reference settings:
Time of first point = Horizontal Position (10 divs x horizontal scale in sec/div x Horizontal
Reference / 100)
Mouse and Touchscreen Operation. This instrument ships with a mouse and
keyboard to give you more options for instrument control. However, for some
installations, you might not have sufficient work space to install the mouse or
keyboard. For most operations, you can use the touchscreen instead.
353
The table below lists some operations and the mouse/touchscreen equivalents.
The instrument ships with two styluses. Using a stylus can make it easier to
perform touchscreen operations.
Table 34: Equivalent mouse and touchscreen operations
Operations
Mouse
Stylus or finger
Select waveforms
Left click object on screen
Touch object on screen
Position cursors on screen, draw a zoom

box
Left click and drag
Touch and drag
Display a pop up menu for a channel or a

readout
Right click object
Touch and hold (dont move stylus)
Type a value in a list box
Click the keyboard icon to pop up the

virtual keyboard; click to type in the value
you want (or use the peripheral keyboard if
installed)
Touch the keyboard icon to pop up the

virtual keyboard; touch to type in the value
you want
Display a tool tip
Rest pointer over UI button or label
None
Display Whats This Help
Click the appropriate button (see below),

and then click a control in the UI application
Touch the appropriate button (see below),

and then touch a control in the UI application
Push toolbar and dialog box buttons

Display menus and select menu items
Activate list boxes
354
main screen button
main screen button
dialog box button
dialog box button
To Display Waveforms in
the Main Time Base View
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments
you can make.
To control the Main view
Prerequisites 1.

in place.
2.
The acquisition system should be set to run continuously.
3.
Set the vertical 4.

display
parameters
Also, an appropriate trigger signal must be applied to

the instrument and triggering must be set up.
See the sampling Module user manuals for sampling

setup and page 345 for trigger setup in this manual.
Push a Vertical Source button (turns amber) to

assign the numbered buttons 18 to operate on
channel, reference, or math waveforms. Push a
numbered button 18 to select the waveform (it
displays).
A waveform button lights when its waveform is on:
H
Lighted green: waveform is on but not

selected
Lighted amber: waveform is on and selected
Hint. Step 4 assumes any reference or math

waveforms you select are defined. See Table 32
on page 350 if you need help defining these
waveforms.
5.
Use the Vertical knobs to achieve a good display

of each waveform you select.
355
Overview
To control the Main view (Cont.)
Set the horizon- 6.

tal display
parameters
Push the View Main button to make sure the Main time
base view is selected. Use the Horizontal knobs to scale
and position the waveform on screen and to set sample
resolution.
Scaled Horizontally
Positioned Horizontally
The Resolution knob sets the record length. (See

discussion on page 317.)
Push the Set to 50% button if required to stabilize
display.
Adjust the 7.
Horizontal
Reference
To adjust the point around which the waveforms

expand and contract, click the Horizontal reference
and drag it left or right on screen.
Horizontal reference
Move the Horizontal reference along the horizontal

axis until it aligns to the point on the waveform you
want to be stationary on screen.
8.
Release the Horizontal reference, and then adjust the

Horizontal Scale knob.
Quick-adjust 9.
the time base
(Zoom)
To quickly rescale a portion of a channel waveform so

it expands to fill the 10 divisions on screen. Click on
screen and drag a box around the portion of the
waveform you want to zoom.
356
Overview
To control the Main view (Cont.)
Explore the 10. The next procedure describes how to set up and
Mag time base
control the Mag time bases.
controls
See To Display Waveforms in a Mag View on page 357.
End of Procedure
To Display Waveforms
in a Mag View
Overview
you can make when using the Mag 1 and Mag 2 time base views.
To control a Mag view
Prerequisites 1.
Set up as from the last procedure. See right.
See To Display Waveforms in the Main Timebase

on page 355.
Turn on a Mag 2.
view
Push the Mag1 or Mag2 View button (turns

amber) to display a Mag view. (See right.)
A numbered button lights when its waveform is
on:
H
Lighted green: view is on but not selected
Lighted amber: view is on and selected
Tip. Drag the divider bar between the two views to

adjust the display height between them. See the
figure in step 3.
357
Overview
To control a Mag view (Cont.)
Set horizontal 3.
display
parameters
Use the Horizontal knobs (see right) to achieve a good

display of the waveform in the Mag time base.
Time base settings for Channel waveforms will be
adjusted as you use the controls; the controls will be
inoperable if you have a reference or a math waveform
selected.
Note that the Mag1 markers enclose a segment of Main
view that appears across the 10 division width of the
Mag view. See below.
Portion magnified in the Mag1 time base view
Main
Divider
bar
Mag
For more 4.
information
Press the Horizontal Menu front-panel button. Click

the
icon in the the upper-right corner of the Horiz
Setup dialog box, and then click any dialog-box
control to pop up help on that control.
5.
Click the Help button in the Horiz Setup dialog box to

access a context-sensitive overview on the horizontal
controls and their set up.
See Accessing Online Help on page 3145 for an

overview of the online help system.
End of Procedure
Customizing the Display

Why Use?
358
Use the display customizing features this instrument provides to present the
display elementscolor, graticule style, waveform representation, and so
onaccording to your preferences.
Whats Special?
Keys to Using
Color grading. You can select color grading of a waveform so that its data color
or intensity reflects the frequency of occurrence of the data.
the display system so that it presents waveforms and other display elements as
you prefer.
Display Settings. Table 35 lists display attributes that you can set and where
they are accessed.
Table 35: Customizable display attributes

Display attribute
Menu name1
Access
Entry
Options
Utility
User Preferences
Setup
Display
Utility
User Preferences
Setup
Display
C
Choose
e from
fr m Normal,
N rm IInfinite
f e Persistence,
er e e and Variable
r e
er e e Modes.
e .
Persistence
Utility
User Preferences
Choose No to display each waveform as a series of dots.
Setup
Display
Choose Yes to display vectors or lines between the dots.
Shortcut
Properties
Utilities
Waveform Props
Utility
Waveform Props
Shortcut
Properties
Cursor Colors
Setup
Cursors
Graticule Colors
Setup
Display
Histogram Color
Setup
Histogram
Mask Color
Setup
Mask Test
Waveform Color
Grading
Shortcut
Color Grading
Choose to display a waveform with its data color graded based on

its frequency of occurrence. See Color grade a waveform on
page 363.
Virtual Keyboard
Utility
User Preferences
Choose from alphabetic or QWERTY styles.
Gr
Graticule
e Stylee
Display Modee
Show Vectors
rm display
(normal
mode only)
W ef rm Label
Waveform
e
W ef rm C
Waveform
Colorr
C
Choose
e from
fr m Full, Grid,
Gr Cross-hair,
Cr - r and Frame
r me styles.
e .
Enter
er a new
e label
e for
f r thee waveform
ef rm you havee selected.
ee e .
C
Choose
e from
fr m sixx different
ffere colors
r for
f r each
e
waveform;
ef rm choosee from
fr m
166 different
ffere colors
r for
f r a cursor,
r r graticule,
r
e histogram,
r m orr m
mask..
Except for Shortcut, the Menu Names refer to the menus found in the Menu bar at the top of the instrument screen. The
shortcut menu for a waveform can be displayed by right clicking on a displayed waveform or on its icon, which is
displayed in the waveform bar (left of the graticule).
359
Normal and Persistence Displays. Use display persistence to control how

waveform data ages:
H
Normal style displays waveforms without persistence: each new waveform

record replaces the previously acquired record for a channel. You can choose
to display normal waveforms as vectors, which displays lines between the
record points or dots (vectors off) which displays the record points only. You
can also choose an interpolation mode. See Interpolation below.
Variable Persistence style accumulates the waveform-record points on screen

and displays them for a specific time interval. The oldest waveform data
continuously fades from the display as new waveform records acquire.
Infinite Persistence style accumulates the data record points until you change
some control (such as scale factor) or explicitly clear the data, causing the
display to be erased. Waveform data builds up as new data records acquire.
Persistence style applies to all waveforms, except for channel waveforms and
reference waveforms displayed with color or intensity grading.
Interpolation. For record lengths of less than 500 points, you can choose to have
the instrument interpolate between the sampled points it acquires. Interpolation
affects the display only; mask testing, histograms, and automatic measurement
results are based on acquired, not interpolated, data. There are three options for
interpolation:
360
Sin(x)/x interpolation computes record points using a curve-fit between the

actual values acquired. The curve-fit assumes all the interpolated points fall
along that curve. Sin(x)/x interpolation is particularly useful when acquiring
more rounded waveforms, such as sine waves. Sin(x)/x interpolation may
introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times.
Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples

by using a straight-line-fit. The straight-line-fit assumes all the interpolated
points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line. Linear
interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains.
None turns interpolation off. Only points actually sampled appear in the
displays of waveform records.
To Set Display Styles
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display styles you
can set.
To set display styles
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must be powered up, with any waveform

you want to display on screen.

page 345 for trigger setup.
Access the 2.
Display setup
dialog box

select Display. See right.
Select normal 3.
style, vectors,
and interpolation
From the Display Setup dialog box (see right) , choose

Normal to select a display with no acquisition data
persistence.
Set Interpolation mode

Check for Normal display
Check for vectors
Waveforms display with the new data from ongoing

acquisitions replacing that data in the same time
intervals/slots but acquired as part of the last, previous
waveform.
4.
Check Vectors to turn on display lines between

waveform dots; uncheck to display only dots.
5.
Select an Interpolation mode from the pulldown list.

Choose from Sin(x)/x, Linear, or None.
361
Overview
To set display styles (Cont.)
Select a 6.
persistence
Mode
From the the Setup Display dialog box (see right),

choose:
H
Infinite Persistence to make data persist until

you change some control (such as scale factor)
or explicitly clear the data. Waveform displays
accumulate data as new waveform records
acquire, resulting in a build up of data in all time
slots.
Variable Persistence to make data persist for a
specified time. New waveform displays
accumulate data as new waveform records
acquire, but with continuous replacement of the
oldest data.
Set Variable
Persistence time
Access to virtual keyboard
If you select Variable Persistence, set a time at

which the oldest data is removed.
Continue with 7.
the next
procedure
For more ways to customize the display, see the next

procedure.
See To Customize Graticule and Waveforms on

page 362.
End of Procedure
To Customize the
Graticule and Waveforms
Overview
you can make.
Customizations you can make
Prerequisites 1.
Display the waveforms to be measured on screen.

The waveform may be a channel, reference, or math
waveform.
2.
362
If the source to be measured is in the Mag1 or Mag2

view, turn that view on.
See page 323 for acquisition setup and page

345 for trigger setup.
Overview
Customizations you can make (Cont.)
Change wave- 3.
form color
or label 4.
Right click on the waveform or its icon. See right.
Type a new name in the Waveform Label box. The

instrument will use the new label to mark the selected
waveform in the graticule area.
6.
Choose a color from the Color pulldown list. Click OK

to dismiss the dialog.
8.
Waveform Icon
Choose Properties from the menu that pops up.
5.
Color grade a 7.
waveform
Right click on the channel waveform or its icon. See

right.
Waveform Icon
Choose Color Grade from the menu that pops up.

Color grading a waveform is one of several instrument
operations that uses a waveform database. There are
two available, so no more than two waveforms can be
color graded at the same time.
363
Overview
Customizations you can make (Cont.)
Reduce a wave- 9. Right click on the waveform or its icon. See right.
form to its icon
10. Choose Show from the menu that pops up to toggle the
waveform between shown (checked) and hidden
(unchecked).
Tip. Hiding a waveform is useful when you temporarily want
to remove the display of a waveform without turning it off.
Hidden waveforms change their waveform icons (in the
Waveform bar left of screen) as shown:
Waveform shown
Waveform hidden
Change grati- 11. From the application menu bar, select Setup, and then
cule style and
select Display. See right.
color
12. Use the graticule controls to select a graticule style.
13. Select the color of the screen from the Background
pulldown list. Select the color of the graticule from the
Foreground pulldown list.
14. Click the
box.
button to close the Setup Display dialog
For further 15. Click the

icon in the the upper-right corner of
assistance
the Display Setup dialog box, and then click any
dialog-box control to pop up help on that control.
16. Click the Help button in the Display Setup dialog box
to access a context-sensitive overview of the display
controls and their set up.
See Accessing Online Help on page 3145 for

End of Procedure
364
Measuring Waveforms
To assist you in analyzing the waveforms you acquire, the instrument comes
equipped with cursors and automatic measurements. This section describes these
tools and how you use them:
H
Taking Automatic Measurements, on page 366, describes how you can set
up the instrument to automatically measure and display a variety of
waveform parameters. See Figure 318.
Taking Cursor Measurements, on page 377, describes using cursors to make

amplitude and time measurements on waveforms. See Figure 318.
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy, on page 383, tells you how to run

compensation routines and deskew channels to optimize the accuracy of your
measurements.
NOTE. You can also make graticule measurements, counting graticule divisions
and multiplying them by the vertical or horizontal scales set for the waveform
you are measuring.
Graticule
Cursors
Readouts
Measurement
Readouts
Cursor
Readouts
Figure 318: Graticule, cursor and automatic measurements
365
Measuring Waveforms
Taking Automatic Measurements

Why Use?
Whats Measured?
Whats Special?
Use automatic measurements to take more accurate measurements with less

effort. Because automatic measurements use the waveform record points, they
are usually more accurate than cursor and graticule measurements. The instrument does the work, continuously taking, updating, and displaying these
measurements.
You get to choose:
H
Select from the extensive range of parameters this instrument can measure;
for a list, see Appendix B: Automatic Measurements Supported.
Feed the entire waveform to a measurement or limit the measurement to a

segment of the waveform. By default, the instrument takes each automatic
measurement over the entire waveform record, but you can use measurement
gates to localize each measurement to the section of a waveform (see To
Localize a Measurement on page 375).
Select from these measurement sources: channel, reference, and math

waveforms, and waveform databases 1 and 2.
This instrument implements a robust automatic measurement system. Some of

the features adding value to this system follow.
Annotate Waveforms On Screen. You can turn on annotations that mark characterization levels that each measurement uses to compute results. See Figure 319.
Annotations intersect to indicate the

area determining measurement
Figure 319: Measurement annotations on a waveform
366
Measuring Waveforms
Use Databases as Sources. If you define the source you want to measure as a
database in the Meas Setup dialog box, you can use the database of that
waveform as source. The measurement you select operates on the accumulated
waveform data (databases accumulate repetitive instances of a source waveform
over time).
For example, consider the Max measurement. Max will capture and update the
maximum (most positive) value encountered. For a database source, the ongoing
Max measurements can only result in a higher max value as the database
accumulates ongoing acquisitions. This process causes the Max measurement
readout to track max up but not down. In contrast, the Max measurement for a
waveform source not included in a database will track variation up and down as
new waveforms are acquired.
Take Eye-Pattern and Optical Measurements. To support characterization of
communication networks and devices, this instrument supports automatic
measurements of Extinction Ratio, Q-Factor, and Clock-to-Data Jitter on
communications waveforms.
Characterize Measurements Independently. To allow you control over how your
waveform data is characterized by each measurement, the instrument lets you set
the methods used independently for each measurement. See High/Low Tracking
Method on page 369 and Reference Levels Method on page 370.
See Statistics on Measurement Results. To see how any automatic measurement
varies statistically, you can display a readout of the Min, Max, Mean, and
Standard Deviation the measurement results. See step 6 on page 373 for
instructions.
Whats Excluded?
Keys to Using
The following exclusions apply when using automatic measurements:

H
More than eight measurements at one time are not allowed.
Except for Average Optical Power, all measurements of the category Eye
Pattern/Optical must be performed on a waveform database (see Use
Databases as Sources on page 367). The Average Optical Power measurement cannot use a waveform database as its source.
The Average Optical Power measurement cannot display Annotations (see

page 366) and cannot use gates or user-defined High/Low methods (see
page 369).
The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up
automatic measurements to obtain the best measurement results.
367
Measuring Waveforms
Measurement Selection. The instrument takes automatic measurements of the

following categories: Amplitude, Timing, Area, and Eye Pattern/Optical. Check
Appendix B: Automatic Measurements Supported for a listing of the measurements that you can choose from in each category.
Number of Measurements. The instrument can take and update up to eight
measurements at one time. You can apply measurements to any combination of
sources (described below). You can take all eight measurements on C1, for
example, or one measurement each on C1 C8.
Measurement Sources. All channel, reference, and math waveforms can serve as
sources for automatic measurements. You can also measure either of the two
waveform databases the instrument supports. You can specify a waveform as
source in the Meas Setup dialog box even if the waveform is not displayed.
Some measurements, such as Gain, Delay, and Phase, require two sources. For
example, Gain would be used to measure an input from one measurement source
(such as C1) with respect to an output in another source (such as C2).
You can also specify a signal type for the source: Pulse or Eye.
NOTE. If you set Signal Type to type Eye, the instrument ignores the settings you
make for High/Low method and always uses the Mean (of Histogram) method. If
you set the signal source to type Pulse, the discussion of High/Low Method that
follows below applies.
Databases as Sources Behavior. Consider the following operating behaviors

regarding measurements and databases:
H
When enabling a measurement, it will always measure the waveform

database if the measurement source you choose is currently displayed as a
waveform database. You can measure the waveform instead of its database if
you turn off Use Wfm Database in the Meas setup dialog box.
If you assign a database to a waveform already being used as a source for an

automatic measurement, it will not automatically measure the waveform
database; you must explicitly specify its use by turning on Use Wfm
Database in the Meas Setup dialog box.
High/Low Tracking. The levels that the automatic measurement system derives as
the High (Top) or Low (Bottom) for a waveform influence the fidelity of
amplitude and aberration measurements. For many of the automatic measurements supported, the instrument automatically determines these levels and
disables all or some of the High/Low tracking method controls (for example,
368
Measuring Waveforms
RMS). If the measurement you select has High/Low methods that are appropriate
to adjust (or example, RISE time), the instrument automatically enables the
method controls for your adjustment as shown below.
Select among methods
Check to use method you select;

uncheck to enter level directly
High/Low Tracking Method. Depending on which measurement you select, High,

Low, or both, tracking will be enabled with their boxes checked as shown above.
You can select among the several modes the instrument provides for determining
these levels:
H
Mode (of Histogram) sets the values statistically. Using a histogram, it

selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint
(depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level). Since
this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations (overshoot, ringing,
and so on), Mode is the best setting for examining pulses. See Figure 320.
High (Min/Max)
High (Mean)
High (Mode)
Mid Reference
Low (Mode)
Low (Mean)
Low (Min/Max)
Figure 320: High/Low tracking methods

H
Mean (of Histogram) sets the values statistically. Using a histogram, it

selects the mean or average value derived using all values either above or
369
Measuring Waveforms
below the midpoint (depending on whether it is defining the high or low

reference level). This setting is best for examining eye patterns and optical
signals. See Figure 320.
H
Min-max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record. This
setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large, flat portions at a
common value, such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform
except for pulses. See Figure 320.
Auto switches between methods. Auto method first attempts to calculate the
high and low values using the Mode method. Then, if the histogram does not
show obvious consistent high and low levels, Auto method automatically
switches to the Min/Max or Mean method.
For example, the Mode histogram operating on a triangle wave would not
find consistent high and low levels, so the instrument would switch to
the Min/Max mode. Consistent high and low levels would be found on a
square wave, so the Auto mode would use the Mode method.
NOTE. For Eye Pattern/Optical measurements, the High/Low method choices are
disabled. The instrument always uses the Mean method for those measurements.
When setting High/Low method, be aware of these operating behaviors:
H
The tracking settings are not global; that is, you can independently set the
method used for each of Meas 1 Meas 8.
You can turn off tracking for either or both the High and Low levels and
enter them directly. (Turning off tracking captures the current High/Low
values and enters them into High/Low control fields, where you can use
them as starting values to modify.)
Not all tracking methods are appropriate for all measurements. If you cannot
set the tracking method, the controls will be disabled.
Reference Levels Method. You can choose the method that the instrument uses to
determine a second group of levels when taking time-related measurements.
These levels are the High, Mid, and Low references. For example, the measurement system takes risetime from the waveform-edge segment that transitions
from the Low to the High reference levels.
The instrument provides the following four calculation methods; refer to
Figure 321 as you read about each method:
1. Relative Reference is calculated as percentage of the High/Low range.
2. High Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values from the High Level.
370
Measuring Waveforms
3. Low Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values from the Low Level.
4. Absolute Reference is set by absolute values in user units.
Reference level calculation methods
High (50 mV)

High Reference
90%
10 mV
90 mV
40 mV
50%
50 mV
50 mV
0 mV
10%
90 mV
Mid Reference (0 mV)
Low Reference
Low (50 mV)
10 mV
40 mV
Figure 321: Reference-level calculation methods

The High and Low levels from which the reference levels are calculated in
methods 1 3 above are the levels established using the selected High/Low
tracking method described in High/Low Tracking Method on page 369.
Default Methods. The waveform-characterization methods just coveredthe
High/Low-tracking and the reference-level-calculation methods usedcan be set
for each measurement and its waveform source in the Meas Setup dialog box. If
you do not set the methods individually, the instrument uses its default characterization methods.
371
Measuring Waveforms
To Take Automatic
Measurements
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the
default settings for High/Low method and for reference-level method.
To take automatic measurements
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must display the waveform to be measured

on screen.

Select the 2.
waveform
Use the Vertical buttons to select the waveform to be

measured.
waveform.
372
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To take automatic measurements (Cont.)
Take Automatic 3.
measurements
Select one of the measurement tool bars.
4.
Click the measurement you want in the measurement tool bar.
5.
Read the results in the measurements readout.

Tip. To show the levels (see page 366) on which
your measurement is based, turn on Annotations:
Right click on measurement in the readout, and
select Show Annotations. from the menu as
shown at right.
To see statistics 6.
7.
Right click on any measurement readout to display its

context menu.
Select Show Statistics to display measurement
statistics in the measurement readout.
373
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To take automatic measurements (Cont.)
To measure a 8.
database
9.

select Measurement. See right.
In the Meas Setup dialog box, make sure the
measurement (one of Meas1 through Meas8) is
selected.
10. In the Source tab, check the Use Wfm Database option
as shown below.
Tip. If, at the time you first create a measurement, the

measurement source you select is displayed as a
waveform database, the database will automatically be
measured. Uncheck the User Wfm Database option if
you want to measure the waveform instead of the
database.
For more in- 11. Press the Help button in the Meas Setup dialog box to
formation
access the online help.
12. See Appendix B: Automatic Measurements Supported,
on page B1 for a list of the measurements and their
definitions.
End of Procedure
374
Measuring Waveforms
To Localize a
Measurement
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to set gates on a measurement source, which
forces the measurement to be taken over a segment of the waveform (otherwise,
the entire waveform feeds the measurement).
To gate a measurement
Prerequisites 1.
Set up as from last procedure.
See To Take an Automatic Measurement on

page 323
Access the 2.
gates

select Measurement. See right.
Enable and 3.
position the
gates
Select the Region tab to expose the gate controls. Click

to check the box as indicated right to turn gating on and
to display the gates on screen.
4.
If Annotations are not on, click the Annotations box, or

the gates will not display.
5.
Use the G1 (Gate1) and G2 spin controls (or click and

type in valuessee right) to adjust the gates on screen
such that the area to measure is between the gates.
Vary to position gates
Check to display gates
Tip. Values are entered as a % of the waveform,

displayed from left to right. If no keyboard is installed,
access the virtual keyboard and use the touch screen to
enter values.
375
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To gate a measurement (Cont.)

Gate G1

Gate G2
End of Procedure
376
Measuring Waveforms
Taking Cursor Measurements

Why Use?
Whats Measured?
Use cursors to measure amplitude and time quickly and with more accuracy than
when using graticule measurements. Because you position cursors wherever you
want on the waveform, they are easier to localize to a waveform segment or
feature than automatic measurements.
Time or amplitude or both. Vertical cursors measure time or bits on screen;
horizontal cursors measure amplitude: voltage, watts, rho, or ohms; and
waveform cursors measure both. Table 36 expands on these definitions.
Table 36: Cursor functions (types)

Cursor function
Parameter measured
Cursor readout
Horizontal cursors measure amplitude (volts, watts). Each cursor

measures with respect to:
Horizontal Cursors
v1 = Level at Cursor 1 with respect to its source ground level
v2 = Level at Cursor 2 with respect to its source ground level
Dv = Level at Cursor 2 Level at Cursor 1
Level is cursor displacement from the source ground times the

source volts/div. Note that the two cursors may have different
sources and therefore can have different volts/div settings.
Vertical cursors measure distance (time in seconds or bits). Each
cursor measures with respect to:
Trigger point
Vertical Cursors
t1 = Time at Cursor 1 with respect to the trigger point
t2 = Time at Cursor 2 with respect to the trigger point
Dt = Time at Cursor 2 Time at Cursor 1
Time is divisions of displacement of the cursor from its source trigger

point times the source time/div. Note that the two cursors may have
different sources and, therefore, can have different time base (Main,
Mag1, Mag2) settings.
Waveform cursors measure both voltage and time. Each cursor is,
in effect, both a vertical and horizontal cursor. Neither of these paired
cursors can be moved off the waveform.
Trigger point
Note that sources can have different volts/div settings.

Waveform Cursors
377
Measuring Waveforms
What Sources
Can I Measure?
Keys to Using Cursors
Cursors can measure channel, reference, and math waveforms, as well as

waveform databases. You may set the source of each cursor explicitly in the
Cursor Setup dialog box.
The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up cursors
to obtain best measurement results.
Cursor Types. The three cursor types are described in Table 36 on page 377.
There are two cursors displayed for all types, Cursor 1 and Cursor 2; the cursor
currently selected for adjustment is the solid cursor (bottom cursor in Figure 322
+ 3 divisions at 100 mV/div
+ 3 divisions at 20 mV/div
Figure 322: Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes

Cursors are Display-Limited. You cannot move a cursor off screen. Also, if you
resize waveforms, the cursors do not track. That is, a cursor stays at its screen
position, ignoring changes to horizontal and vertical scale and position (and to
vertical offset).
Cursors Default to the Selected Waveform. Each cursor measures its source,
defined in the Cursors Setup dialog box. Note the following behavior regarding
source selection:
H
378
When cursors are first turned on, the instrument automatically assigns them
to use the waveform currently selected on screen as the source for each
cursor. Up to the time you turn cursors on, you can select a waveform on
screen to use it as the source for the cursors.
Measuring Waveforms
Once cursors are on, selecting a different waveform does not change the
source the cursors measure. To change the source while cursors are on, you
must change the source in the Cursors Setup dialog box.
Turning cursors off restores the default cursor source assignment so that
assignment again tracks the currently selected waveform.
Cursors Can Treat Sources Independently. Each cursor can take a different,
independent source, with each source having its own amplitude scale and time
scale. Consider the example presented by Figure 322 on page 378:
H
Cursor1 is set to measure channel 3 (C3), which is set to 100 mV/div, so the
cursor readout v1 measures C3 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x
100 mV/div, or about 300 mv.
Cursor 2 is set to measure reference l (R1), which is set to 20 mV/div, so the

cursor readout v2 measures R1 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x
20 mV/div, or about 60 mv.
Note that the value of each graticule division, relative to the delta readout, is
not readily apparent because the delta-amplitude readout (Dv) must account
for the different amplitude-scale settings of the sources. To do so, the Dv
readout displays the results of v2 v1 (60 mv 300 mv = 240 mv),
automatically accounting for the different scales of the cursor sources.
Time readouts behave similarly with regard to different sources with different
time bases. Each cursor displays its time readout, t1 or t2, with respect to the
time base of its source, and Dt is calculated as t2 t1, automatically accounting
for any difference in the time base of each cursor source.
NOTE. If a cursor readout does not seem correct, check the source of each cursor
in the Cursor Setup dialog box. Each cursor readout relates to the amplitude and
time base settings of their source.
Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point. Remember that each vertical
cursor measures the time from the trigger source to itself. This relationship is
shown in Figure 323 on page 380.
379
Measuring Waveforms
Horizontal Ref = 0%
First sampled point

Trigger point of cursor
source
Cursor readout (tn) = Time to first point +
Horizontal divs x sec/div
Cursor
Figure 323: Components determining Time cursor readout values

Note that a vertical cursor readout (t1 or t2) includes and varies directly with the
time-to-first-point component, which varies directly with the horizontal position
set for the time base used by the cursor-source waveform. To see the amount of
time to the first point, press Horizontal Menu on the front panel and set
Horizontal Ref to 0% in the dialog box that displays. Now the Horizontal
position readout shows the time to first point, and subtracting this value from the
cursor readout yields the cursor position on screen relative to first point. (You
can find the horizontal readout both in the dialog box and in the control bar at
the bottom of the screen.) The following relationships hold:
Time to First Point = Horiz Position (when Horiz Ref Position is set to zero)
t1 or t2 readouts = Time to First Point + Additional Time to Cursor
Cursor Units Depend on Sources. A cursor that measures amplitude or time will
read out in the units of its source as indicated in Table 37. Note mixed sources
require the delta readouts to follow the units of the cursor 1 source.
Table 37: Cursor units
Cursors
Standard units1
Readout names
Horizontal
volts, watts, rho, ohms
v1, v2, Dv
Vertical
seconds, bits
t1, t2, Dt
Waveform
volts, watts, seconds, bits
v1, v2, Dv, t1, t2, Dt
380
If the v1 and v2 units do not match, the Dv readout defaults to the units used by the v1
readout; if the t1 and t2 units do not match, the Dt readout units defaults to t1 readout
units.
Measuring Waveforms
To Take a Cursor
Measurement
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to take cursor measurements on waveforms.
To take cursor measurements
Prerequisites 1.
At least one waveform must be selected on screen. Or

you can set cursor values directly using the procedure
referenced at right.
See To Set the Cursor Sources on page 382.
Take cursor 2.
measurements
Press the CURSORS button (see right). Press:

H
once to display vertical bar cursors (shown below).
twice to display horizontal bar cursors.
a third time to display waveform-based cursors.
3.
Press the SELECT button to toggle selection between

the two cursors. The active cursor is the solid cursor.
4.
Turn the General Purpose knob to position each cursor

on the waveform to measure the feature that interests
you.
5.
Read the results in the cursor readout.

In the figure shown above, waveform cursors are
used to measure the bit-time of the eye diagram.
Tip. The cursor readout indicates the source time
base and waveform for the selected cursor; in this
case, the main time base, M1, and channel 1 C1.
381
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To take cursor measurements (Cont.)
To reassign cur- 6.
sors
Press the Cursor button repeatedly to toggle through the

cursor selections until the cursors are off. Then select a
new waveform on screen.
Tip. You can set the cursors source(s) directly using the
procedure listed at right.
See To Set the Cursor Sources on page 382.
End of Procedure
To Set the Cursor Sources
Overview
You can target each cursor to the source it is to measure. (See Cursors Treat
Sources Independently on page 379). To do so, use the procedure that follows.
To set the cursor sources
Prerequisites 1.
Display the waveforms to be measured on screen.

waveform.
2.
Display the Cur- 3.

sor Setup dialog box
382
If the source to be measured is in the Mag1 or Mag2

time base, turn that time base on.


select Cursors. See right.
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To set the cursor sources (Cont.)
Select the cur- 4.

sor sources

Click to access sources
From the pop-up list (see right) for each of Cursor 1 and
Cursor 2, select a source:
H
To measure a single source, choose the same

source for both cursors Main C1, for example.
To measure two different sources in the same time

base, make sure the time bases match Main
C1 and Main C2, for example.
To measure two different sources in different time

bases, select different waveforms and time
bases Main C1 and Mag1 C2, for example.
Select source from

pop-up list
Math & Ref sources

appear if defined
Mag1 & Mag2 sources
appear if displayed
Tip. References and Math waveforms are listed as

sources only if defined and turned on. All sources listed
for the Main time base are also listed for the Mag1 and
Mag2 time bases if the time base views are displayed
on screen.
End of Procedure
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy

Why Use?
The procedures given here will increase the accuracy of the measurements you
take.
Compensation
This instrument can compensate itself and the sampling modules installed,
optimizing the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms you measure.
Compensation optimizes the capability of the instrument to make accurate
measurements based on the ambient temperature.
NOTE. After first installing a sampling module(s) or moving a sampling module
from one compartment to another, you should run compensation from the
Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets it specifications.
383
Measuring Waveforms
To Compensate the
Instrument and Modules
Overview
Use the following procedure to optimize the instrument for the current temperature to enhance measurement results.
To perform a compensation
Prerequisites 1.
Instrument should have the sampling modules installed

and be powered on. Allow a 20 minute warm up.
See Install the Sampling Modules on page 18.
Display the 2.
Compensation
dialog box
384
From the application menu bar, select Utilities, and then

select Compensation. See right.
In the Compensation dialog box, the main instrument
(mainframe) and sampling modules are listed.
The temperature change from the last compensation is
also listed. See below.
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To perform a compensation (Cont.)
Select the 3.
scope of the
compensation
Wait until the Status for all items you want to

compensate changes from Warm Up to Comp Reqd or
Pass.
4.
In the Select Action fields, select Compensate.
5.
From the top pulldown list, select the target to

compensate. Choose from:
H
All to select the main instrument and all its

modules (default selection).
Mainframe to select only the main instrument.
Module to select an individual module for

compensation.
Click to select
Compensate
Choose targets to
compensate
Enabled only if Module
selected as target
If you have selected Module as the target, also choose

the channel to be compensated from the pulldown list of
channels.
Run the 6.
compensation
Click the Execute button to begin execution of the

compensation.
C to start
r
Click
compensation
Instructions to disconnect inputs and install dust

covers on optical module channels and 50 ohm
terminations on electrical module channels will
appear on screen. Be sure to follow static
precautions (see the user manual for your sampling
module) when following these instructions.
Note. Failing to install the 50-ohm terminations can
yield erroneous compensation failures or results.
See Equipment Required on page 121.
The compensation may take several minutes to
complete. Pass should appear as Status in the
dialog box when compensation completes.
If Fail appears as Status, rerun the compensation. If
Fail status continues after rerunning compensation
and you have allowed warm up to occur, the module
or main instrument may need service.
End of Procedure
385
Measuring Waveforms
To Deskew Channels
Overview
When making differential, common-mode, or other measurements, you may need

to null out the propagation delay contributed by the input cabling between two or
more channels. Use the following procedure to adjust the deskew between
channels.
To deskew between channels
Prerequisites 1.
Drive the connection circuitry with signals you want to

deskew.
2.
Set the instrument to trigger on the slope of the

waveform that matches that of the edges you want to
deskew.
3.
Display the signals on screen.
Set up the 4.
reference
channel
5.
Deskew the 6.
channel
386

Function
generator
Set up the channel to be used as the reference channel:

a
Push the channel numbered button under Vertical

on the front panel.
Use the Vertical SCALE knob and POSITION

knobs to display the waveform edge to be
deskewed to fill the screen vertically.
Use the Horizontal SCALE knob and POSITION knobs

to display the waveform edges to be deskewed to fill the
screen horizontally.
Set up the channel to be deskewed: repeat step 4 for

the channel to be deskewed.
7.
Push Vertical MENU front panel button, and from the

Vertical Setup dialog box, adjust the Deskew value (see
right) to make the edges of the reference and the
deskew channel coincide (or are as close as possible).
8.
If you cannot align the edges completely, try selecting

the reference channel and adjusting its deskew. See
right.
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To deskew between channels (Cont.)
Deskew 9. If you need to, you can deskew additional channels:

more channels
10. Turn off the channel just deskewed, and leave the
reference channel on.
11. Set up the channel to be deskewed: repeat step 6 and
step 7 for the new channel to be deskewed.
12. Continue this process for as many channels as you want
to deskew.
13. Disconnect the deskew hookup.
End of Procedure
To Perform Dark-Level
and User Wavelength Gain
Compensations
Overview
Performing a dark-level calibration will maximize the accuracy of the extinction

ratio and other optical automatic measurements you take. Performing a User
Wavelength Gain compensation will optimize an optical channel for your custom
input signal. Use the following procedure to perform either compensation; this
procedure applies only to optical modules.
To perform optical compensations
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must be installed with at least one

optical sampling modules to be dark-level calibrated in
place. The acquisition system should be set to run
continuously.
See the sampling-module User Manuals for

Select the 2.
waveform
Use the Vertical buttons to select the channel to be

compensated.
387
Measuring Waveforms
Overview
To perform optical compensations (Cont.)
Access 3.
dark-level compensation
Run the dark- 4.

level compensation
5.
From the application menu bar, click Setup, and then

click Vertical. See right.
In Vert Setup dialog box, click the Dark Level button

under Compensation. See right. Follow the instructions
on screen.
Repeat steps 2 and 4 for any additional optical channels
you want to compensate.
Run the user If you want, you can can compensate an optical channel for
wavelength gain a custom input signal:
compensation
6. In Vert Setup dialog box, click the User Wavelength
Gain button under Compensation. See right. Follow the
instructions on screen.
7.
In the User Wavelength Gain Compensation dialog box,

set the wavelength and power of the signal to be
applied to the channel. See below.
8.
Press the OK button to execute the compensation.
9.
Repeat steps 2, 6, and 7 for any additional optical

channels you want to compensate.
End of Procedure
388

Once you have acquired waveforms or taken measurements on waveforms, the
instrument can mathematically combine them to create a waveform that supports
your data-analysis task. For example, you can define a math waveform that
combines waveforms mathematically (+, , /, x). You can also integrate a single
waveform into an integral math waveform as is shown below.
Source waveform
Math waveform
Defining Math Waveforms

This instrument supports mathematical combination and functional transformations of waveforms that it acquires. Figure 324 shows this concept:
Channel waveform
(C2)
Math expression
(function(source))
Math waveform
(M1)
Diff(C2)
Figure 324: Functional transformation of an acquired waveform
389
Why Use?
Create math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference
waveforms. By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data
into math waveforms, you can derive the data view that your application
requires. You can create math waveforms that result from:
H
mathematical operations on one or several waveforms or measurements: add,

subtract, multiply, and divide.
function transforms of waveforms, such as integrating, differentiating, and so

on.
You can create up to eight math waveforms; see Keys to Using on page 391 for
more examples.
Whats Special?
Some features of note follow:

Functions. Powerful functions, such as integrate, differentiate, average, can be
taken on single waveforms or more complicated expressions.
Measurement Scalars. The results (scalars) from automatic measurements can be
used in expressions. For example, you can use the measurement Mean on a
waveform and subtract, from the original waveform, the scalar that results to
define a new math waveform.
Whats Excluded?
390
Some operations that you cannot use with math waveforms follow:
H
Math-on-Math. You cannot use math waveforms as sources for other math
waveforms. For example if you have a math waveform defined as
M1 = C1 C2, you cannot define a second math waveform as
M2 = M1 + C3. You can however expand the second math waveform to
M2 = C1 C2 + C3.
Mag Time Base Expressions. Sources for math expressions must be sources
associated with the Main time base. For example, M3 = C1 + C2 uses these
sources as acquired and displayed by the Main time base, not by the Mag1 or
Mag2 time base. You cannot create M3 = C1(Main) C2(Mag1).
Waveform Databases as Sources. If you assign a channel to a waveform

database and then use the channel in a math-waveform expression, the data
currently acquired in the channel is used, not the data accumulated in the
waveform database over time.
Keys to Using
The key points that follow describe considerations for creating math waveforms
that best supports your data-analysis tasks.
How to Create. You create math waveforms when you create a math expression.
You do so by applying numerical constants, math operators, and functions to
operands, which can be channel, waveforms, reference waveforms, measurements (scalars), or fixed scalars. You can display and manipulate these derived
math waveforms much like you can the channel and reference waveforms (see
Operations on Math Waveforms on page 395).
Some examples of typical math waveforms follow.
Table 38: Math expressions and the math waveforms produced

To...
Enter this math expression...
and get this math waveform...
...normalize a waveform
...
...shifted and scaled to fit a std. template
Source Waveform
Normalized Math Waveform

1.6V
0.8V
CHAN1
...simulate ac coupling and integrate
(C1 Meas1)/ Meas2,

where
C1 is waveform shown left
Meas1 = Low of C1
Meas2 = amplitude of C1
...
Source Waveform
5.0 V
1.0V
CHAN1
Intg(C1Meas1),
where
C1 is waveform shown left
Meas1 is set to take the Mean of C1
1.05V
1.00V
0.95V
+0.05V
0.00V
0.05V
...DC component removed before integration

AC Integration Math Waveform
+3V
3V
Sources. Math Waveforms can incorporate the following sources:

H
Channel waveforms
Reference waveforms
Measurement scalars (automated measurements) that measure channel or

reference waveforms in any time base
Fixed scalars that you enter as numerical constants in expressions
391
Source Dependencies. In general, math waveforms that include sources as

operands are affected by updates to those sources:
H
Shifts in amplitude or DC level of input sources that cause the source to clip
also clip the waveform data supplied to the math waveform.
Changes to the vertical offset setting for a channel source that clip its data
also clip the waveform data supplied to the math waveform.
Changes to the acquisition mode globally affects all input channel sources,
thereby modifying any math waveforms using them. For example, with the
acquisition mode set to Envelope, a C1 + C2 math waveform will receive
enveloped channel 1 and channel 2 data and, therefore, will also be an
envelope waveform.
Clearing the data in a waveform source causes a baseline (zero-volt level) to

be delivered to any math waveform that includes that source until the source
receives new data.
Time Base Dependencies. Selections for math-waveform sources (operands)

consist of channel and reference waveforms that are acquired or defined and
viewed in the main time base.
The math waveforms derive their time base and record lengths from waveform
sources. You cannot change them directly; you can only change them indirectly
by changing the time base for the source.
In case of sources having different record lengths, the math waveform created
matches the shorter waveform, and the additional trailing data from the longer
waveform is not used.
Expression Syntax. You build math waveforms using the Define Math Waveform
dialog box. To help you create valid math waveforms, this dialog box blocks
illegal entries by disabling any dialog-box element that would create an invalid
entry in the math waveform expression.
The syntax that follows describes valid math expressions, which can be quite
complex (in excess of 100 characters long):
<Expression> := <UnaryExpression> | <BinaryExpression>
<UnaryExpression> := <UnaryOperator> ( <Term> )
| <UnaryOperator> ( <Expression> )
<BinaryExpression> := <Term> <BinaryOperator> <Term>
| <Scalar> <BinaryOperator> <Term>
| <Term> <BinaryOperator> <Scalar>
<Term> := <Waveform> | ( <Expression> )
392
<Scalar> := <Integer> | <Float> | <MeasResult>

<Waveform> := <ChannelWaveform> | <ReferenceWaveform>
<ChannelWaveform> := C1 | C2 | C3 | C4 | C5 | C6 | C7 | C8
<ReferenceWaveform> := R1 | R2 | R3 | R4 | R5 | R6 | R7 | R8
<UnaryOperator> := Integrate | Differentiate | Average | Max | Min
| Filter | Vmag | Exp | log | ln | sqrt
<BinaryOperator> := + | | / | *
<MeasResult> := meas1 | meas2 | meas3 | meas4 | meas5 | meas6 | meas7 | meas8
To Define a
Math Waveform
Overview
Use the procedure that follows when defining a math waveform. Remember, you
should first ensure that the sources you use exist. Channel sources will be
acquired when used in a math expression, reference waveform sources should
contain saved waveforms, and so on. These sources do not have to be displayed
to be used.
To define a math waveform
Prerequisites 1.
All channel and reference waveforms and automatic

measurement scalars that you will use in your math
waveform must be available (channels and references
contain data, measurement scalars are defined, and so
on.)
Note. If you use a channel that is not acquiring,
including it in a math waveform that you turn on will
implicitly cause it to be acquired.
Display 2.
the Math
dialog box
Related control elements & resources
See sampling-module user manuals for sampling

setup and page 345 for trigger setup in this
manual.
Press the Vertical MATH button twice if it is unlit, once if

lighted, to display the Define Math dialog box.
393
Overview
To define a math waveform (Cont.)
Select a math 3.
waveform
Click the Math Waveform drop-down list in the dialog

box and select a one of the eight available math
waveforms, M1 through M8. Be sure to click to check
the On box, so that the waveform displays.
Tip. If the waveform you select already exists, its math
expression appears in the dialog box. You can still use
the waveform by clicking the Clear button, which
discards its previous math expression. Or repeat step 3
to select another waveform.
Build a math 4.
expression
Apply a filter 5.
394
Use the dialog box at right to define a math expression.

See Table 38 on page 391 for expression examples;
some guidelines for creating your expression follow:
H
Sources C1 C8, R1 R8, and Meas1

Meas8 should be set up before you use them
(references and automated measurement scalars
defined).
Elements that appear grayed out cannot be

selected because they would result in an illegal
entry. For example, the sources are grayed out
because a source was just entered. You must enter
an operator before entering another source.
Use the backspace button to remove the last entry;

use the clear key to remove the entire expression
and start over.
Use parentheses to group terms in the expression

to control execution order, for example,
5*(C1 + C2).
Use the filter controls in the dialog box to apply a filter to

the math waveform defined by the expression. Here are
some guidelines:
H
Num Avgs. Set the number of averages applied by

the Avg( function. Only affect waveforms if the Avg(
function is used.
Filter Risetime. Set to limit risetime to improve TDR

measurement results.
Filter Mode. Choose Centered or Shifted for causal

or noncausal filtering.
Overview
To define a math waveform (Cont.)
Apply the 6.
expression
Once you have defined the math expression to your

satisfaction, click the Apply button. Then click on the
OK button to dismiss the dialog box. See To Use Math
Waveforms on page 397 for more procedures.
For more 7.
information
Click the
icon in the the upper-right corner of the
Define Math dialog box, and then click any dialog-box
control to pop up help on that control.
8.
Click the Help button in the Define Math dialog box to

access context-sensitive overview on math waveforms.
See Accessing Online Help on page 3145 for

End of Procedure
Operations on Math Waveforms

This instrument supports many of the same operations that it provides for
channel (live) and reference waveforms. For example, you can measure math
waveforms with cursors. This section introduces these operations:
Why Use?
Whats Excluded?
Vertical display scaling and positioning
Taking automatic measurements
Taking cursor measurements
Use math waveform operation, such as those listed above, to enhance the
displaying, processing, and analyzing of math waveforms. For example, in
addition to the operations listed, you can save math waveforms as references and
make them the source of either of two onboard waveform data bases.
Some operations allowed on channel waveforms are not allowed on math
waveforms:
H
Independent horizontal scaling. Each math waveform that you create derives
its horizontal scale and position from the sources you include in its math
expression. Horizontal controls will not operate with math waveforms.
You can adjust these controls for the source waveforms and your adjustments
will reflect in the math waveform as the sources update. You can also
magnify math waveforms using the Mag1 or Mag2 derived time bases.
395
Keys to Using
Independent vertical offset. You cannot adjust the offset for a math waveform; you can adjust the offset of channel waveforms used as sources to a
math waveform.
Explicit gating of waveforms. The entire math waveform is used as input to

the automatic measurement system.
Basically, you use the same techniques to work with math waveforms that work
with channel waveforms. The key points that follow describe operating
considerations to take into account when using math waveforms.
Source Considerations. In general, be aware that changes to source waveforms
that you include as math-expression operands are reflected in the math waveform. See Source Dependencies on page 392.
Display Considerations. Turn on and off the display of math waveforms like you
do channel and reference waveforms. Use the same front-panel controls
(waveform selection buttons, vertical position and scale knobs) and application
controls (waveform control bar elements at the bottom of the display; vertical
setup menu). Mouse operation for positioning waveforms on screen work also.
As is true for channel and reference waveforms, turning a math waveform on or
off in any time base display, Main, Mag1, or Mag2, also turns it on or off in all
the time bases.
396
To Use Math Waveforms
Overview
The procedure that follows demonstrates some common operations you can
perform on math waveforms:
To use math waveforms
Prerequisites 1.
The Math waveform must be defined and displayed. See

the reference listed at right.
See To Define Math Waveforms on page 393
Select and dis- 2.

play
3.
Press the Vertical MATH button. The button of the

currently displayed and selected math waveform will
light amber; the buttons of all other currently displayed
math waveforms will light green. Math waveforms not
displayed remain unlighted.
Press any waveform button to make it the selected
waveform. If the waveform was not displayed,
operation is as follows:
H
If the waveform you select is defined, it displays,

otherwise..
the Define Math dialog box displays so that you

can define and turn on the waveform you just
selected. (See To Define a Math Waveform on
page 393 for a procedure for doing so.)
Tip. You can also click the math waveform in the

display, or its icon at the left of the display, to select it.
Set scale and 4.

position
Use the Vertical Scale and Position knobs to size and

position the waveform on the screen.
Tip. You cant adjust the offset of a math waveform.
However, adjustments of offset settings in the source
waveforms will reflect in the math waveform as
determined by its expression.
Tip. You cant adjust horizontal scale, position, and
sample density (resolution) of math waveforms. If
adjusting these settings affect sources for a math
waveform, the adjustment will be reflected in the math
waveform.
397
Overview
Take automatic
measurements
To use math waveforms (Cont.)

5.
Press the Vertical MATH button, and use the

numbered front-panel button to choose a math
waveform from M1 M8. (See right.)
6.
Select one of the measurement tool bars.
7.
Click a measurement button. The instrument

automatically takes the measurement on the
waveform you selected in step 5.
8.
Read the results in the measurements readout.
Tip. For more control of your measurement, go to

the Setup menu (in the application menu bar) and
select Measurements. Click the Help button in the
Measurements Setup dialog box that displays for
more information.
.
398
Overview
Take cursor
measurements
To use math waveforms (Cont.)

9.
Press the Vertical MATH button, and use the

numbered front-panel button to choose a math
waveform from M1 M8. The button will light amber
when you have chosen the waveform. (See figure at
upper right.)
10. Press the CURSORS button (see figure at lower

right). Press:
H
Once to display vertical bar cursors (shown

below)
A second time to display horizontal bar cursors
A third time to display waveform-based cursors
11. Press the SELECT button to toggle selection

between the two cursors.
12. Turn the knob to position each cursor on the math
waveform to measure the feature that interests you.
13. Read the results in cursor readout.

In the figure shown above, waveform cursors are
used to measure the V of the integral math
waveform, which could be used to compute its
area (svdt).
End of Procedure
For more information on taking automatic and cursor measurements of waveforms, see Measuring Waveforms on page 365.
399
3100

This section describes the input and output capabilities of your instrument.
Specifically, it covers:
H
Saving and Recalling Setups on page 3101
Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3108
Exporting Waveforms on page 3116
Printing Waveforms on page 3120
Remote Communication on page 3121
Sampling
module
Acquisition
system
Trigger
system
Time base
system
Signal processing
& transformation
system
Output and
storage
User Interface
and display
Saving and Recalling Setups

This instrument can save a number of different instrument setups for later recall,
limited only by the space you have to store the setups.
Why Use?
Whats Special?
Save and recall different setups to switch from setup to setup without having to
first manually record your settings and then manually set them. This capability is
helpful when you want to:
H
save and recall a setup that optimizes the instrument for displaying and
analyzing a certain signal.
save a series of setups to help automate a procedure through recall of a

sequence of saved setups as part of performance of the procedure.
export a setup for sharing with a second instrument.
3101
Commenting. The Save-Setup and the Recall-Setup dialog boxes provide for
including and viewing comments with your saved setups. That way, you can
store information, readable upon recall, that describes each setup you save and its
intended application.
Virtual Keyboarding. If you do not have a keyboard connected, you can still enter
comments and name setup files. The Save and Recall Setup dialog boxes include
the Virtual Keyboard button, shown left. When you touch or click it, the
instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your
mouse or the touch screen to enter the setup-path name, setup-file name, and
comment.
Whats Excluded?
Keys to Using
The instrument excludes the following items when saving setups:

H
Waveforms in channels (C1-C8) or references (R1-R8). Control settings

(scale, position, and so on) are saved but not the waveform data. Upon recall
of the setup, the settings are applied, but the data is not restored.
Waveforms in Math Waveforms (M1-M8). Control settings and the math

expression are retained but not the waveform data. Upon setup recall, the
recalled math waveform expressions will be applied, but there is math no
math waveform data to restore. Instead, a new math waveform will be
generated based on the recalled expression.
User Options that are stored in the Windows Registry. These include all
options accessed by first selecting Utilities (menu bar), and then User
Preferences (Utilities menu).
Standard Masks. Standard masks are not stored with the setups. However, if
your recalled setup includes display of a mask, recalling the setup will, in
turn, display the mask. Also, masks you define are stored with the setups.
saving and recalling of setups.
All Settings are Retained. The instrument includes almost all instrument settings,
with a few exceptions (such as user options) in the saved setup.
Retaining Current Settings. Recalling a setup replaces the current setup with the
recalled setup. If you do not want to lose your current setup, save it to its own
setup file for later recall before you recall the new setup.
Avoiding Setup/Waveform Mismatches. Saved setups may contain settings
inappropriate for waveforms currently in your instrument. For example, you
might have saved a setup that displayed a fiber channel mask, such as FC531, for
3102
testing channel 1. If later you display a gigabit ethernet signal in channel 1 and
recall your saved setup, the FC531 mask will display.
Avoiding Setup and Sampling Module Mismatches. Recall of a setup assumes that
that the sampling module appropriate to the recalled setup is installed. For
example, recalling a setup that saved optical vertical-control settings requires
that an optical sampling module be installed. If not, the instrument substitutes
default settings for the affected vertical controls settings instead of recalled
settings. Other examples of such mismatches include:
To Save Your Setup
Recalling a setup that includes TDR without the TDR-capable sampling

module installed. You must have the TDR-capable module installed in the
same compartment it was in when the setup was saved.
Recalling a setup that includes a clock-recovery setup without the appropriate clock-recovery-capable sampling module installed. You must have the
clock recovery-capable module installed in the same compartment as when
the setup was saved.
Use the procedure that follows to save a setup to the instrument hard disk, a
floppy disk, or third-party storage device.
3103
Overview
To save your setup
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have appropriate sampling

modules in place before powering on the instrument.
2.
3.
Set up the instrument controls as you want them saved

as part of a recallable setup.
See Sampling Module User Manuals for

For help in making your setup, check the references at

right and other sections in this chapter specific to the
setup you wish to make.
See page 323 for acquisition setup.
See page 345 for trigger setup.
Display the 4.
Save Setup dialog box
From the application menu bar, select File, and then

select Save Setup. See right.
Name a destina- 5.
tion
Use the Save in: drop-down list and buttons (see right)
to navigate to the directory in which to save your setup.
3104
Control elements & resources
The Save Setup dialog box allows for the entry of a file
name, file type, and includes a field for adding your
comments. See below.
Overview
To save your setup (Cont.)
Name your 6.
setup
Name your setup file by either:

H
accepting the default file name that appears in the

File name: text box.
clicking in the File name text box and typing a new

name, replacing the default file name.
clicking an existing name in the file list (if any are

listed). Data in existing file will be overwritten.
Tip. If your instrument lacks a keyboard, touch or click

on the virtual keyboard icon (indicated right) to display a
virtual keyboard. You can use the mouse or touch
screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the
name fields and comments fields.
7.
If not selected, select *.stp in the Save as type list box

as the type of file. (Setup files are always type *.stp).
Tip. Only change the type if you want to temporarily see
any other types of files in the current directory.
Otherwise, leave it set at *.stp.
Add a comment 8.
(optional)
Enter a useful comment about each setup you save.

Write the comment such that it explains the purpose of
the saved file when that file is later accessed (see right).
Tip. Use comments frequently. The comment that you
enter appears when you (or others) later select your
setup in this dialog box or in the Recall Setup dialog
box. In the first case, it might help you avoid overwriting
a setup you wanted to keep; in the second case, it can
help determine the purpose of the setups saved earlier.
Save your setup 9.
Click the Save button to save the setup file. To cancel

without saving, click Cancel button.
For more 10. For more help on saving setups, click the Help button
information
in the Setup dialog box to access contextual help on
screen.
End of Procedure
3105
To Recall Your Setup
Overview
To recall your setup
Prerequisites 1.
Display the 2.
Recall Setup
dialog box
Name a 3.
destination
3106
Use the procedure that follows to recall a setup to the instrument. Remember that
recalling a setup replaces the existing setup, which is lost.
The instrument should have appropriate sampling

modules in place for the setup to be recalled. You must
have access to a setup saved by the instrument.

See Keys to Using on page 3102.

select Recall Setup. (See right.)
The Recall Setup dialog box allows navigation to
directories, lists setup files in the directory, and provides
for selection of a setup file. Comments for selected files
appear in the comment box. (See below.)
Use the Look in: drop down list and buttons (see right)
to navigate to the directory which contains a setup that
you want to recall.
Overview
To recall your setup (Cont.)
Select your 4.
setup
If not selected, select *.stp in the Save as type of file to

include in the dialog box file listing. (Setup files are
always type *.stp).
Otherwise, leave it set at *.stp.
5.
Choose your setup file by either:

H
Clicking an existing name in the file list.
Clicking in the File name field and typing a new


on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual
keyboard. You can use the mouse or touch screen with
the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields
and comments fields.
View any in- 6.

cluded comment (optional)
Read the comment associated with the setup you

choose if any is present. It can contain information about
using the setup you are about to restore (see right).
Tip. Selecting a file displays any comments that were
entered when the setup was saved. Comments can help
you ascertain the purpose of the setups saved earlier.
Recall your 7.
setup
Click the Recall button to save the setup file. To cancel

without recalling a setup, click the Cancel button.
Tip. You can also recall the default setup from this
dialog box; clicking the Default button recalls the the
factory default setup.
For more 8.
information
For more help on recalling setups, click the Help

button in the dialog box to display contextual help on
screen.
End of Procedure
3107
Saving and Recalling Waveforms

This instrument can save any number of waveforms, limited only by the space
you have to store them.
Why Use?
Whats Special?
By saving a waveform, you can recall it at a later time for comparison, evaluation, and documentation. This capability is helpful when you want to:
H
recall a waveform for further evaluation or comparison with other waveforms.
extend the waveform carrying capacity of the instrument. The instrument

supports eight reference, eight channel, and eight math waveforms. If you
want more than eight references, you can save the additional reference to
disk for recall later.

Commenting. The Save-Waveform dialog box and the Recall Waveform dialog
box contain a comments field for including and reading comments with your
saved waveforms. That way, you can store information, readable upon recall,
describing each waveform that you save.
Virtual Keyboarding. If you do not have a keyboard connected, you can still enter
comments and name waveform files. The Save and Recall Setup Waveform
dialog boxes include the Virtual Keyboard button shown left. When you touch or
click it, the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use
with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the waveform-path name, file name,
and comment.
Whats Excluded?
3108
You cannot recall into a channel or a math waveform. The instrument recalls
each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations (R1-R8). Also, you
cannot save and recall waveform databases.
To Save Your Waveform
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to save a waveform or waveforms to the

instrument hard disk, a floppy disk, or third party storage device.
To save a waveform
Prerequisites 1.
2.

Make sure the waveform to be saved exists; that is, your
source must be a channel, an active math waveform, or
an active reference. Display the waveform in the
timebase in which you want to save it, Main1, Mag1,
and/or Mag2, or the waveform will not appear in the
Save Waveform dialog box.
For help in setup and acquiring waveforms, check the
references at right.
Display the 3.
Save Waveform
dialog box

See page 323 for acquisition setup.
See page 345 for trigger setup.
See page 351 for time base display.

select Save Waveform. See right.
The Save Waveform dialog box lists all available
waveforms for all displayed timebases, allows for
browsing to destination directory (saving to file) or for
selecting a reference (saving to one of R1-R8). It also
includes a field for adding your comments. See below.
3109
Overview
To save a waveform (Cont.)
Select a 4.
destination
Select your 5.
waveform(s) to
save
Navigate to the directory in which to store your

waveform. You can:
H
Save to a reference: Click to check Reference, and

then use the pulldown list to select any reference
(R1-R8). You can save to empty references or save
over existing references. Skip to step 8 to finish.
Save to a file: Click to check file and continue with

step 5 that follows.
Select one or more waveform to save:

H
Click a waveform in the tree view (see right). Note

that only displayed timebases and their waveforms
appear.
Extend your selection, if desired, by holding down

the control key and clicking additional waveforms,
or...
Select all waveforms in a given timebase by

clicking the timebase (for example, click Main).
Select waveforms individually
Select all waveforms in timebase
Tip. If your instrument lacks a keyboard, you cant use

the control key to extend selections. However, you can
touch or click individual waveforms or timebases to
select them.
Select directory 6.
and name file
Specify the directory and filename(s) in which to save

your waveform(s). If youve selected a single waveform,
you can:
H
Use the default name and directory appearing in

the File Path field.
Click to access the file system (see right) and

navigate to a new directory.
Edit path and file name

Access to file system
Rename the file and/or change the directory by

typing a new name and path into the File Path field.
If youve selected multiple waveforms, the file path field

will change to Dir\Prefix. You can edit the path and the
prefix used for the filenames as just described. All files
will save into the same directory. The file path field will
change to Dir\Prefix.
3110
Overview
To save a waveform (Cont.)
Add a comment 7.
(optional)
For saves to files or to references, you can enter a

useful comment about the each waveform you save.
Write each comment such that it explains the purpose of
the saved waveform when its waveform file is later
accessed (see right).
Tip. If you save multiple waveforms, the instrument
saves your comment with all the resulting files, so make
such a comment pertain to all the waveforms.
Save your 8.
waveform
For more 9.
information
Click the Save button to save the waveform file or

reference. To cancel without saving, click Cancel button.
For more help on saving waveforms, press the Help

button in the dialog box to access the contextual
online help.
End of Procedure
3111
To Recall Your Waveform
Use the procedure that follows to recall a waveform to a reference. You can only
recall waveforms into references.
NOTE. Reference waveforms do not recall because they are already instrument
resident. You can copy a reference waveform to another reference: first display
the reference to be copied, and then use the Save Waveform procedure to save it
to another reference (R1-R8).
Overview
To recall a waveform
Prerequisites 1.
Display the Re- 2.

call Waveform
dialog box
3112



select Recall Waveform. (See right.)
The Recall Waveform dialog box allows navigation to
directories, lists waveform files in the directory, and
provides for selection of a waveform file. Comments for
selected files appear in the comment box. (See below.)
Overview
To recall a waveform (Cont.)
Name a 3.
destination
Use the Look in: drop down list and buttons (see right)
to navigate to the directory which contains a waveform
that you want to recall.
Select your 4.
waveform
If not selected, select *.wfm in the Files of type field to

force the dialog-box file listing to only include these
types. Use *.wfm for waveforms.

Otherwise, leave it set at *.wfm.
5.
Choose your waveform file by either:

H
Clicking an existing name in the file list.
Clicking in the File name field and typing a new


on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual
keyboard. You can use the mouse or touch screen with
the virtual keyboard to type entries in the File name and
Files of type boxes.
View any 6.
included comment (optional)
Read the comment associated with the waveform file

you choose, if a comment is present. It can contain
information that help you use the waveform you are
about to restore (see right).
Tip. Selecting a file displays any comments that were
entered when the waveform was saved.
3113
Overview
To recall a waveform (Cont.)
Recall your 7.
waveform
Click the Recall button to save the waveform file. To

cancel without recalling a waveform, click Close button.
For more 8.
information
For more help on recalling waveforms, press the Help

button in the dialog box to access contextual online
help.
End of Procedure
3114
To Clear References
Overview
You can clear individual references of data individually or all at once. If a

reference is listed as active and you are sure you do not want the data it contains,
use the procedure that follows to clear it. You can clear any active reference
listed of R1-R8.
To clear a reference
Display the 1.
Clear References dialog
box
Select Refs 2.
From the application menu bar, select Edit, and then

select Clear References. See right.
Click to select the reference to clear. If you have a

keyboard installed, you can hold down the control key
and click to select multiple references for deletion. Click
the Clear button to delete; click the close button to
dismiss the dialog box.
End of Procedure
3115
Exporting Waveforms and Histograms

This instrument also supports export of a waveform or histogram to a file. The
instrument exports the data as comma-separated ASCII text.
Why Use?
Keys to Using
To Export Your Waveform
3116
By exporting a waveform or a histogram, you can use it with other analysis

tools, such as spreadsheets or math-analysis applications.
The key points that describe operating considerations for setting up the exporting
of waveforms and histograms follow:
H
Waveforms export as a series of comma-separated values (CSV), which are

amplitudes without units. Theres no timing information, but data is placed
in the file in sequence from first sample in waveform record to the last.
Histograms also export as a series of comma-separated values (CSV), which

are values without units. One value is present for each bin in the histogram.
Because the waveforms are exported as CSV, without timing and scaling
information, the instrument does not import these waveforms directly. If you
intend to recall a waveform later, save it (see the procedure To Save Your
Waveform on page 3109) instead of exporting it. You cannot import
histograms.
You may also choose to copy a waveform and paste directly into some
applications such as Microsoft Word or Excel. If so, select your waveform,
and then select Copy in the Edit menu.
The procedure to exporting waveforms is almost the same as the procedure to

save a waveform. Use the procedure To Save Your Waveform on page 3109
while observing the following differences:
H
Select Export Waveform from the the File menu instead of Save waveform.
The Export dialog box displays (see Figure 325 that follows).
You can only select and export one waveform at a time.
You cannot include comments with your exported waveform.
Your exported waveform will contain the waveform data as a series of

comma separated values (no timing information, but data is sequential).
Figure 325: Export dialog box
To Export Your Histogram
Use the process just described for exporting a waveform on page 3116, select
the Histogram button in the Export dialog box (see Figure 325). Also skip
selecting a source. The instrument supports a single histogram, so the current
histogram is automatically selected. If no histogram is enabled in the Hist Setup
dialog box, the Histogram button will be disabled in the Export dialog box.
To Use an Exported
Waveform (or Histogram)
How you use the exported waveform or histogram depends on your application.
The following example is a simple application using a waveform; the procedure
is general and may require adapting for your spreadsheet or other data-analysis
tool.
Overview
To use exported waveforms
Prerequisites 1.
2.
MS Excel 97 running on a PC or on the instrument.

Access to a waveform exported by the instrument.
H
See To Export Your Waveform on

page 3116.
3117
Overview
To use exported waveforms (Cont.)
Import the 3.
waveform data
4.
In Excel, select Open from the File menu. Use the

dialog box that pops up to navigate to the directory
containing the file.
In the dialog that displays, make the selections as
shown right as you navigate through the Text Import
Wizard. You must select delimiter as your data type,
comma as the delimiter type, and General as your
data type.
Tip. This step assumes MS Excel 97; your tool may
have similar import features for comma-separated data. Check its documentation.
Begin your 5.
chart
Click on the row number to select the entire row

containing your imported waveform values (see left).
6.
Select the Chart button from the toolbar (see left) or

from the Insert menu.
Select the entire row
Access the Chart Wizard
3118
Overview
To use exported waveforms (Cont.)
Specify a 7.
line-graph
chart
From the Chart Wizard, make sure Built In is checked.

Then select the either Lines in the Standards Types
tab or Smooth lines in the Custom Types tab. (See
right.)
Finish the 8.
chart
Click Next to step through the next two steps

accepting the defaults settings at each step. Click the
Finish button in step 4. You should have a waveform
display similar to that show right.
Tip. This procedure assumes MS Excel 97. You can

likely specify titles, customize the treatment and
labeling of the x and y axes, etc. in your data-analysis
applicationeither as you create the chart or
afterward. Use the help for your data-analysis
application to determine if it has these capabilities
and for instructions in using them.
For more 9.
information
For more help on exporting waveforms., press the

Help button in the dialog box to access contextual
online help.
See page 3145 to learn about accessing online help.
End of Procedure
3119
Printing Waveforms
You can print the display screen, including any waveforms displayed. Before
doing so, you must install and set up your printer. Consult the instructions that
come with your printer. Also for printer setup instructions, you can display
Windows help and access its section on printers (see page 3151 for information
on accessing Window help).
To print a waveform, from the application menu bar, select the File menu, and
then select Print. The instrument displays the standard MS Windows 98 Print
dialog box shown in Figure 326. Access the windows help system for more
information.
Figure 326: Print dialog box

NOTE. If the display screen printouts have missing information such as blacked
out readouts, your instrument may need to be set to a higher color setting. To do
so, follow the steps below.
1. Click the minimize button () in the upper right corner of the UI application
to expose the desktop.
2. Right click on the desktop, and select Properties from the menu that pops
up.
3. Select the Settings tab in the Display Properties dialog box.
4. Select High Color in the Colors list box.
3120
5. Click the OK button to apply your changes. If a confirmation box appears,

click its OK button.
6. Click the TDS/CSA8000 button in the Windows toolbar to return the UI
application to the screen.
NOTE. If you print the screen infrequently, you may want to return the colors
setting to 256 colors except when printing. To return to 256 colors, repeat the
procedure above, but select 256 colors in step 4.
Remote Communication
Remote communication is performed through the GPIB interface. Consult the
online Programmer Guide for help with establishing remote communication and
control of the instrument.
To access the Programmer Guide, select Programmer Guide in the Help menu
from the front screen.
3121
3122
Using Masks, Histograms, and Waveform Databases

The instrument comes equipped with statistical tools to help you display, test,
and evaluate waveforms. This section describes these tools and how you use
them:
H
Mask Testing Waveforms, on page 3123, describes how you can use
standard or user-defined masks to set up the instrument to automatically
detect mask violations in communications and other waveforms.
Taking Histograms, on page 3134, describes how to take histograms to

view the horizontal or vertical distribution of data on your waveforms.
Using Waveform Databases, on page 3139, describes how to accumulate a

waveform into the database and use the waveform database to view the
waveform data weighted with respect to how frequently it reoccurs in the
database.
Mask Testing Waveforms

This section overviews the instrument features related to mask testing, including
how to create, edit, delete, and activate masks. You can select a standard mask,
edit a mask, or create an new mask from scratch.
Why Use?
Use mask testing to test your waveforms for time or amplitude violations. Mask
testing will count waveform samples (called hits or violations) that occur within
a specific area (the mask).
Use the communications-standard masks that this instrument provides (SONET/
SDH, Fiber Channel Optical and Electrical, Gigbit Ethernet) to test your signals,
or define your own masks.
Whats Special?
Some mask testing features of note follow:

Flexible Mask Editing. You can use the controls in Mask Setup dialog box to
completely specify custom masks or edit existing masks, selecting, adding/deleting, and placing a vertices in user-defined (waveform source) units. For quick
edits, you can use can use the mouse or touchscreen to drag to resize and
reposition the masks directly on the screen.
3123
Mask-Specific Autoset. You can set Autoset to either Auto or Manual in the Mask
Setup dialog box. When set to Auto, the instrument automatically performs a
standard, mask-specific autoset whenever you select a standard mask.
Whats Excluded?
GPIB editing. You can not edit masks through the programmable interface
(GPIB). You can, however, still create and/or delete entire masks through this
interface.
Concurrent Mask Tests. Only one mask standard (or user defined set) is active at
any time. If you have a mask selected/enabled and then select a new mask, the
new mask replaces the previous mask. You cannot test to multiple standards
simultaneously.
Keys to Using
The key points that describe operating considerations for using and editing
masks follow:
Mask Standards and Masks. A mask standard contains one or more masks that,
when applied against the waveforms for which they are intended, test the
waveform for violations of an industry standard. The supported standards are
listed in Table 39.
Masks are numbered polygons that define an area within a mask standard (or
within a user mask) in which to count waveform samples as hits.
Table 39: Standard masks
3124
SONET/SDH
Fiber channel
Other
OC1/STM0
51.84 Mb/s
FC133 Optical 132.8 Mb/s
Gigabit Ethernet
OC3/STM1 155.52 Mb/s
OC9
466.56 Mb/s
OC12/STM4 622.08 Mb/s
FC1063 Optical 1.0625 Gb/s
OC18
933.12 Mb/s
FC133 Electrical 132.7 Mb/s
OC24
1244.2 Mb/s
OC36
1866.2 Mb/s
OC48/STM16
2488.3 Mb/s
FC1063 Electrical 1.0625 Gb/s
Table 39: Standard masks (Cont.)

SONET/SDH
Fiber channel
Other
OC192/STM64
FEC1066
OC768
FEC4266
9953 Mb/s1 and 10.66 Gb/s
1
This mask is a preliminary estimate of a 9.953Gb/s (OC192/STM64) based upon

established qualitative mask shapes from the accepted 2.48832Gb/s eye mask.
Users can define alternate interpretations of a 10 Gb/s mask using the Mask Edit
feature to edit this mask or by creating a User mask.
Mask Counts. The instrument lists statistics for each mask (polygon) in the
enabled standard (or user) in the Mask readout on the right side of the instrument
screen. Each mask is listed by its number, with its count of hits, the number of
hits common to all masks, and the total count of waveforms acquired.
Mask Editing. Masks can be edited, in which case they become a User mask.
Some tips on creating and using masks follow:
H
When editing, locate one point along the left edge or right edge of the mask
further left or further right than any other point. You can still create straight
lines along the edge; just place one point further left of right than the others
on the edge.
The vertices numbers increase according to their order from left to right. The
instrument reassigns numbers to vertices during mask creation or editing to
hold to this rule.
When adding new points to a mask, the instrument determines their location
in the mask as follows (see Figure 327):
a. Defines an imaginary line between the leftmost vertex and rightmost
vertex in the mask.
b. Defines all points above the imaginary line as the top of the mask; all
points below as the bottom of the mask.
c. Inserts new user-added points above the imaginary line into the top of
the mask; inserts new user-added points below the imaginary line into
the bottom.
To create a mask with a concave area, create several masks to cover the same
area. Data falling into two overlapping masks is counted only once as part of
the total mask hits.
3125
These points form

the top of the mask
Top/bottom dividing line

(not displayed)
Left-most point
Right-most point
These points form

the bottom of the mask
Figure 327: Creating a user mask

Note in Figure 328 that a new vertex has been added to the mask shown in
Figure 327. Since the point is added above the line, its added to the top.
User added vertex
Figure 328: Adding a new vertex
3126
To Mask Test a Waveform
Overview
Masks are saved with setups, so you can save sets of masks by defining
them, and then storing the instrument setup. Displayed masks are overwritten when you recall a stored setup, select a standard mask, or initialize the
instrument.
Use the procedure that follow to set up the instrument to mask test a waveform
against a mask standard or user defined mask set.
To Mask Test a Waveform
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have at least on waveform turned on.
Related Control Elements and Resources
See Display Waveforms on page 347 for

information on displaying waveforms.
Access the Mask 2.

Setup dialog box
Select Mask from the Setup menu to display the Mask

Setup dialog box.
3127
Overview
To Mask Test a Waveform (Cont.)
Select the mask 3.

source and turn on
a mask
4.
Select the waveform to be mask tested from the drop-down

list under Source.
Use the Comm Standard drop-down list to select a
standard or user-defined mask. See Table 39 on
page 3124 for a list of available standard masks.
Selecting a communication standard or userdefined
mask automatically:
5.
displays the mask on screen, and autosets for the

mask, if Automatic is checked in the dialog box.
automatically enables mask testing; uncheck

Enable Mask Counts if you want to turn off mask
counting.
displays mask count statistics in the mask readout

right of the display. A mask does not have to be
displayed to have mask counting enabled.
Check Use Wfm Database to use a waveform database as

the waveform source.
Tip. Selecting a source that is currently displayed as a
waveform database automatically enables mask testing
on the database. To mask test the waveform instead of
its database, uncheck the Use Wfm Database box.
Adjust the mask 6.
You can use the color pulldown list to change the color
of the selected masks on screen.
7.
You can add or subtract from the masks on screen.

Check On to turn on mask margins. Adjust the Margin
percentage box control to increase (positive %s) or
decrease the masks on screen.
Autoset the wave- 8.

form to mask
Click the Autoset button to perform an autoset on the

mask-source waveform.
Tip. You can choose to autoset the mask-source
waveform to the mask anytime you select a new mask
standard; just check Automatic option under Autoset.
3128
Overview
To Mask Test a Waveform (Cont.)
Set Stop Action & 9.

start testing

select Acquisition.
10. In the Acq Setup dialog box (see right), check the
Condition option under Stop After.
11. In the Condition pulldown list, select a maskrelated
criteria, such as Mask Total Hits and set a count, such
as 1, in the count box.
These settings will stop acquisition when mask
violations satisfy the criteria you set here. See below.
12. Push the RUN/STOP front-panel button to restart
acquisition, if stopped.
Restart testing 13. To restart after a Stop After condition occurs, push the
front-panel CLEAR DATA front-panel button.
Tip. If you want to acquire one, and only one, more
waveform after the Stop After condition occurs, push
the RUN/STOP front-panel button instead of CLEAR
DATA.
3129
To Edit a Mask
Overview
When you edit a mask in an existing communications standard, the mask type
switches from the selected standard to type User, and uses the masks from the
Standard as a basis for editing. Use the procedure that follows.
To edit a mask
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have at least on waveform turned on

and the Mask Setup dialog box displayed.

Select a mask 2.
Next, you need to select and enable a standard mask

set. To start with a standard mask, pull down the
Comm Standard list and choose a standard mask. To
create a mask from scratch or edit an existing
user-defined mask, select User in the Comm Standard
selection list.
Open Mask 3.
Edit dialog box
Click Mask Edit... to display the Mask Edit dialog box.
3130
Note: The Mask Setup dialog box and Mask Edit dialog
box are both within the Mask tab. Use the Edit Mask
and End Mask Edit buttons to toggle back and forth
between the two Mask dialog boxes.
Overview
To edit a mask (Cont.)
Select a 4.
mask to edit
Select a mask to edit from the Mask list. This section of

the Mask Edit dialog box lists all masks available for edit
and the number of vertices each mask has.
Add, edit, or delete 5.

mask vertices
Once you have selected a mask, use the Vertex section

of the Mask Edit dialog to add, edit, or delete individual
vertices. Use the Vertex Number box to select a vertex
number for the selected mask.
6.
Use the Horizontal and Vertical box controls to set the

horizontal and vertical positions of the selected vertex.
Tip. You may also drag and drop vertices directly on the
mask to new locations. Click on the mask on the
graticule to select it. Vertices are designated with an X.
7.
Click Add to add a vertex to the selected mask. After

clicking Add, click the location on the selected mask (in
the graticule) where you want to the new vertex added.
8.
Click Delete to delete the selected vertex from the

selected mask.
Note: When you add or delete a vertex, the Mask list is
updated to show the new number of vertices for each
mask.
9.
Click End Mask Edit to close the Mask Edit dialog box
and return to the Mask Setup dialog box.
End of Procedure
3131
Counting Masks
Mask-counting statistics are displayed in the mask readout at the right-side of the
display. Mask counting statistics are displayed as soon as you enable a mask, and
stay visible even if the mask isnt displayed on screen.
Mask number and hits count

Total number of hits in all masks
Total number of waveforms for all masks
If mask counting is enabled, read the results as follows:

H
Mask (n): Each mask in the standard is listed by number (Mask 1 for
example) along side the number of hits in that mask.
Total: Displays the total of all hits in all masks.
Waveforms: Displays the number of waveforms that have been tested

against the masks.
To zero the counts for all masks, click Clear in the Mask Setup dialog box.
NOTE. Executing Clear will clear not only the mask counts, but also the
underlying waveform data. For example, if mask testing on a waveform database
the database data is cleared and accumulation is restarted, and if mask testing
on a waveform being averaged or enveloped, Clear restarts the averaging or
enveloping.
3132
To Create a New Mask
Masks are created by connecting the points independently of the order they are
entered. Points are connected by sorting the points in left-to-right order and
grouping them across a diagonal from the left-most point to the right-most point.
If two points share the same horizontal position along either the left or right edge
of the mask, then the diagonal runs from the top left-most point to the bottom
right-most point. Points below the diagonal form the bottom boundary of the
mask; points above it form the top boundary.
Use the procedure that follows to create a mask from scratch:
Overview
To create a new mask
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have at least on waveform turned on

and the Mask Setup dialog box displayed.

Select and display 2.

a user-defined
mask
Create a 3.
new mask
4.
To create a mask from scratch select User in the Comm

Standard selection list.
Click Mask Edit to display the Mask Edit dialog box.

In the Mask list, select the user-defined mask you wish to
edit.
5.
Use the Vertex controls to add, position, and delete

vertices on your new mask. You may also drag and drop
vertices directly on the graticule display.
6.
Click End Mask Edit when you are finished creating your
mask to apply all additions/changes and return to the Mask
Setup dialog box.
7.
Read Helpful Hints (immediately following this procedure)

for more information on creating masks.
3133
End of Procedure
Taking Histograms
The instrument can display histograms constructed of waveform data. You can
display both vertical (voltage) and horizontal (time) histograms, but only one at a
time.
Histogram Box
Histogram Readout
Histogram
Figure 329: Vertical histogram view and statistics on data
Why Use?
Whats Special?
Use histogram statistics to analyze a range of data that you select.

Some histogram features of note follow:
Flexible Histogram Editing. You can use the controls in Hist Setup dialog box to
completely specify the histogram box on the waveform, in waveform units or as
a percent of the graticule. For quick edits, you can use can use the mouse or
touchscreen to drag to resize and reposition the box directly on the screen.
Any Waveform or database as Source. Histograms can be taken on all channel,
math, and reference waveforms. You can also take a histogram on either one of
the two waveform databases this instrument provides.
3134
Continuous Operation. The histogram you set up can run and its results be
displayed even if you turn off display of the histogram or of the waveform
selected as its source. Histogram data is continuously accumulated and displayed
until you explicitly turn it off or clear the waveform data of the histogram source.
Whats Excluded?
Histograms longer than 500 bins. Histograms are limited to the on screen
resolution, limiting horizontal sizes of 500 bins.
Multiple histograms. One histogram can be displayed on one source at a time.
The source can be any waveform in any of the three Views, Main, Mag1, or
Mag2.
Keys to Using
Histograms
histograms so that they best support your data-analysis tasks.
Histogram Counting Stays On. Once you check Enable Histogram in the
Histogram Setup dialog, histogram counting starts and continues until you turn
disable the histogram or clear the histogram counts. If the histogram is not
displayed on the graticule but histogram statistics still appear on the display,
histogram counting is still running.
NOTE. Histogram counts are cleared when push Clear button in the Hist Setup
dialog box or when you push CLEAR DATA on the front panel. Also, changing
any acquisition control will implicitly clear all acquired data and the histogram
count as well.
Histogram Size. The maximum vertical histogram size is 400 bins. The maximum
horizontal size is 500 bins.
Recalling Setups. The histogram state is restored to what it was when the setup
was saved.
3135
To Take a Histogram
Overview
Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the
default settings for histograms.
To take a histogram
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have at least one waveform displayed to access the Hist Setup dialog box.
See page 355 for waveform-display

instructions if needed.
Access the 2.
histogram
Open the Hist Setup dialog box by selecting Histogram in

the Setup menu.
Set, display, and 3.

reset histogram
source and type
4.
Use the Source pulldown list to select a waveform source

for the histogram.
5.
Click the Vertical or Horizontal histogram option button of

you choice. You can only display one type of histogram at
a time.
6.
Check if you want the data taken on an accumulation of the

source waveforms (a waveform database) instead of on
the currently acquired waveform.
7.
Press Clear to reset the histogram count and to clear the

data in the source waveform. Histograms track numbers of
counts. Clicking Clear resets those counts to zero and
begins counting from zero.
3136
Check Enable Histogram to start histogram counting,

display the histogram on screen, and turn on the
Histogram readout.
Overview
To take a histogram (Cont.)
Set histogram dis- 8.

play options
Use the Histogram to turn on and off the display of the

selected histogram (histogram counting remains
enabled). Use the color list to select a color for the
histogram. Select a value in the Size box to adjust the
histogram display on screen.
9.
Select Linear to display histogram data linearly. Bin

counts are scaled linearly by dividing the bin count by
the maximum bin count.
10. Select Logarithmic to display histogram data logarithmically. Bin counts are scaled logarithmically. Logarithmic
scaling provides better visual details for bins with low
counts.
Set histogram limit 11. Use the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right boxes to set the
controls
size and location of the histogram box. The histogram
box selects the section of the waveform used for
histograms.
12. Select Absolute to use units based on the source
waveform. Select % to display the histogram box as a
percentage of the graticule. This display setting
considers the top-left corner of the graticule to be 0,0
and the bottom-right corner to be 100,100.
Tip. It is quicker to use the mouse or touchscreen to
drag to size the histogram box on screen, then fine tune
the values if needed with the Limit Controls.
End of Procedure
3137
Histogram
Statistics
After you check Enable Histogram in the Histogram Setup dialog box, histogram
statistics appear on the right-hand side of the screen. The following table is a list
of the available histogram statistics and a brief description of each.
Table 310: Histogram statistics
3138
Name
Description
Mean
The average of all acquired points within (or on) the histogram
box.
Median
Half of all acquired points within (or on) the histogram box are less
than and half are greater than this value.
Standard Deviation
The standard deviation (Root Mean Square (RMS) deviation) of all

acquired points within (or on) the histogram box.
Peak-to-Peak (Pk-Pk)
The peak-to-peak value of the histogram. Vertical histograms

display the amplitude of the highest nonzero bin minus the
amplitude of the lowest nonzero bin. Horizontal histograms display
the time of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the time of the
leftmost nonzero bin.
Mean"1 StdDev(m"1s)
The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 1

standard deviation of the histogram mean.
Mean"2 StdDev(m"2s)

standard deviations of the histogram mean.
Mean"3 StdDev(m"3s)

standard deviations of the histogram mean.
Peak Hits
Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram.
# of Histogram Hits
Displays the number of hits within or on the histogram box.
# of Waveforms
Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the

histogram.
Using Waveform Databases

A waveform database is a three-dimensional accumulation of a source waveform
as it is repeatedly acquired. In addition to the standard vertical and horizontal
dimensions, each waveform sample in a waveform database has a third dimension of count. The count represents the number of times a specific waveform
point has been acquired or generated.
Why Use?
Whats Special?
Whats Excluded?
Use waveform databases to take measurements, run histogram calculations, and

do mask testing based on a waveform accumulated in a database, rather than a
single waveform stored in acquisition memory.
Some waveform database features of note follow:
H
Waveform record length is not limited to 500 (horizontal waveform database

dimension and number of horizontal display columns) when waveform
databases are active. Record lengths can vary over the entire allowable range.
To emphasize the data that occurs less frequently, you can toggle the Invert
Color/Intensity control in the Waveform Database setup dialog box, which
reverses the intensity/color assignments to each pixel in the database display.
The following operations are excluded:

References as sources. Because references contain static data that does not
update, they are not available as a waveform source for waveform databases.
More than two waveform databases. More than two waveform databases cannot
be created at one time. Note the following behaviors regarding waveform
databases:
H
There are only two waveform databases; you can explicitly assign and
reassign Database1 and Database2 to waveform sources in the Wfm
Database dialog box.
Once the two databases are allocated, the only way to assign a new
waveform is to change the waveform source of Database1 or Database2 in
the same dialog box, which releases its existing source.
If both databases are assigned and you attempt to implicitly assign a

waveform source to a database (for example by right clicking a waveform
icon in the Waveform bar and selecting color grading), the instrument will
display a notice that no databases are available.
3139
NOTE. The above exclusion does not mean that a waveform database cannot be
used by multiple systems or features. For example, you can use the same
database as the source for a histogram, an automatic measurement, and a mask
test.
Interpolation or vector displays. Waveform database accumulation is always a dot
mode accumulation; therefore, no interpolation or vectoring is performed.
Keys to Using
The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up a
waveform database.
Dimensions. Waveform database dimensions match those of the database source
and are described as follows:
H
Horizontal (columns): Always 500 columns, which is the maximum

horizontal graticule view size. Columns are in horizontal units that match the
horizontal units of the source.
Vertical (rows): Always 402 rows, which is the maximum vertical graticule
size plus one row each for overrange (OR) and underrange (UR). Rows are
in vertical units that match the vertical units of the source.
Count (weights or density): 32 bits.
Display. When you assign a waveform database to a waveform source (using the
Waveform Database Setup dialog box) you must explicitly turn on the waveform
database display if you wish to see it on screen; otherwise, the waveform source
displays using the default (vector) display. The waveform database still
accumulates in the background and can be turned on later without clearing the
database.
3140
To Set Up
a Waveform Database
Overview
To assign a waveform to one of the two waveform databases of the instrument,

use the procedure that follows:
To set up a waveform database
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have a waveform displayed to enable

the waveform database controls.
See page 355 for information on displaying

waveforms.
Open the Wfm 2.

Database Setup
dialog box
Open the Waveform Database dialog box by selecting

Wfm Database in the Setup menu.
Select the source 3.

and turn on the
database
Use the Source pulldown list to select a waveform source

for the waveform database. By default, the first available
waveform is used as the waveform source unless you
select a different source.
4.
Check On to begin accumulating into the waveform

database.
5.
Check Display Database to turn on the display of the

waveform database on the graticule.
NOTE. An alternative method of turning on a waveform
database for the selected waveform is by clicking the
waveform database button in the toolbar. See right.
See Figures 330 and 331 on next page to see what
both normal and waveform database waveform data
look like on the graticule.
End of Procedure
3141
As you can see in the illustrations below, the normal vector view of a waveform
displays the waveform data in dot mode: the waveform display is updated with
each acquisition to reflect the current data. In Fig 331, waveform database
display has been turned on and you can see the waveform data accumulation is
displayed all at once, with subsequent acquisition data being added to the
display as it is acquired.
Figure 330: Normal vector view of a waveform
Figure 331: Waveform database view of a waveform
3142
To Customize the
Database Display
Overview
To change the display options of waveform database data on the graticule, use
the procedure that follows:
To customize the database display
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must have a waveform assigned to one of

the two waveform databases.
See To Set Up a Waveform Database on

page 3141.
Access the 2.
Wfm Database
Setup dialog box
Set display options 3.
Open the Waveform Database dialog box by selecting

Wfm Database in the Setup menu.
Choose from the following display options:

Color: Choose color to draw the waveform database in
colors that vary with how frequently each sample value
occurs in the database.
Intensity: Choose Intensity to draw the waveform
database with varying intensities that vary with how
frequently each sample value occurs in the database.
Emphasize Counts: Move this slider control to change
the grading intensity or colors. Selecting a lower count
value causes a larger distribution of bins with lower
counts.
Invert Color/Intensity: Choose this option to reverse
the color or intensity assignments to each grading
partition. Inverting the colors may make it easier to view
the variations of color or intensities, and makes it easier
to see frequencies or occurrences with smaller numbers
of counts.
Examples 4.
See the illustrations on the next page to see examples of

waveform database data using different display options.
3143
Notice the difference in intensities of the same

data between these two illustrations. In the top
illustration, this portion of data is lighter in
intensity signalling it is least-occurring. In the
illustration to the right, with Invert Color/Intensity
turned on, this data appears much darker,
allowing you to see the data more clearly.
Figure 332: Waveform database data using the Intensity display option
End of Procedure
3144

This manual represents only part of the user assistance available to you the
online help system, integrated as part of the instrument user interface, provides
quick-to-access support for operating the instrument. This section describes the
help system and how to access it.
Whats Available?
The instrument provides the following help resources online:
Why Use?
Keys to Using
Tool tips
Whats This? Help
Overview Help
Setup Procedures Guide
Programmers Guide
Use online help as your primary, always-on-hand, user information source for
this instrument. Most of the information you need to operate this instrument and
use it effectively is found in the online help, where you can quickly access it and
display on your instrument screen.
The key points that describe operating considerations for using the online and
other documentation for this instrument follow:
H
Use online help when you want to minimize interruption to your work flow.
Often a tool tip or Whats This? Help, each of which pop up brief information in a bubble displayed on screen, gives you enough support to continue
your setup. Overview help is there when you need to probe more deeply into
feature operation.
Use the manuals to read instructions on putting the instrument into service,
procedures on reinstalling its product software, listings of specifications, and
overviews of features and their operation. See Documentation Map on page
22 for an description of the documents for this instrument and their
purposes.
Use the online programmers guide, either displayed on the instrument

screen, or on any windows-equipped PC, for support on operating the
instrument from the GPIB.
3145
How to Use Online Help

Use the procedure steps that follow to access contextual help and to learn how to
search the help system for more information.
Overview
To use the online help
Prerequisites 1.
The instrument must be powered up and running.
H
For a brief 2.
description of
controls
See Installation, page 17.
Move your mouse pointer and let it rest over a control;

that is, a menu name, a menu item, tool-bar button,
tool-bar readout, etc.
When you perform this step, the help system pops up a
short definition or a label of the control. See right.
For a more 3.
robust
cescription
4.
Click the Whats This? button in the main display or in a

dialog box. The button varies in form as shown at right.
After clicking, the mouse pointer changes to the
following icon:
Now click the control you want described. A bubble pops
up describing the control. See below.
Whats This? button for main display
Whats This? button for dialog boxes
3146
Overview
To use the online help (Cont.)
For in depth, 5.
contextual
overviews
Most dialog boxes, whether setup or other types, have a

Help button as shown right. Click the button to open the
help system with an overview of the dialog box thats
currently displayed. See below.
Click or touch here
3147
Overview
To dig deeper 6.
3148
You can search for in depth help using methods with

which most users of PCs are familiar: from the
application menu bar, select Help, and then select
Contents & Index. See right.
7.
From the online help finder (see below), choose from the
three tabs.
8.
Click the book icons to expose topic titles, and then

click a topic to highlight it. Click the Display button
to open the topic in a help window.
.
Overview
For instruction 9.
procedures
You can display step-by-step setup instructions for

setups you want to make: From the application menu
bar, select Help, and then select Setup Guide. See
right.
10. Select a procedure from the list that displays. The

procedure will display in a help window that is sized and
located to minimize interference with the controls
needed to perform it. See below.
3149
Overview
To enable full- 11. If you cannot find the information in the Contents or
text search
Index tabs of the online finder, you may want to enable
full text search: From the application menu bar, select
Help, and then select Contents & Index. See right.
12. From the online help finder (see below), choose the
Find tab.
13. Choose the method for word list generation and

select next or finish. Once the word list generation
finishes, future accesses of the find tab will
.
immediately access a pane for searching with full
text search without requiring the word to be
regenerated.
3150
Overview
To Access Op- 14. Click the minimize button to reduce the User Interface
erating System
Application to an icon on the operating system
Help
toolbar. See upper right.

Click to Minimize to the toolbar
15. Click the Start button to pop up the Start menu, and
then select Help from the menu. See lower right. The
online help for the Windows operating system
displays.
16. When your done with the online help, you can dismiss
it. To restore the user interface application to the
screen, click its icon in the tool bar.
Tip. To switch between online help and the
application, you can hold down the ALT key while you
press Tab repeatedly to alternate between bringing
help to the front and the application.
Click for
Windows 98
Help
End of Procedure
3151
3152

You may need to periodically clean the exterior of your instrument. To do so,
follow the instructions in this section.
WARNING. Before performing any procedure that follows, power down the
instrument and disconnect it from line voltage.
Exterior Cleaning
CAUTION. To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external
cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint-free cloth or a softbristle brush. If any dirt remains, use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75% isopropyl
alcohol solution. Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and
connectors. Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis that may
damage the chassis.
Clean the On/Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel. Do not spray or
wet the switch directly.
CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the
plastics used in this instrument. Use a 75% isopropyl alcohol solution as a
cleaner and wipe with a clean cloth dampened with deionized water. (Use only
deionized water when cleaning the menu buttons or front-panel buttons.) Before
using any other type of cleaner, consult your Tektronix Service Center or
representative.
Flat Panel Display Cleaning

The instrument display is a soft plastic display and must be treated with care
during cleaning.
3153
CAUTION. Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel
display.
Avoid using abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display
surface.
Avoid spraying liquids directly on the display surface.
Avoid scrubbing the display with excessive force.
Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a
clean-room wipe (such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes, #05701, available from
Kimberly-Clark Corporation).
If the display is very dirty, moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75%
isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface. Avoid using excess
force or you may damage the plastic display surface.
3154
Appendix A: Specifications
NOTE. This specification is for the instrument; there are also specifications
associated with the optical and electrical modules. Please refer to the user
manual that shipped with your module for those specifications.
This appendix contains the specifications for the CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer, and the TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope. All
specifications are guaranteed unless noted as typical. Typical specifications are
provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed. Specifications that are
marked with the n symbol are checked in Performance Verification chapter of
the service manual, an optional accessory.
All specifications apply to the instrument and sampling modules. unless noted
otherwise. To meet specifications, three conditions must first be met:
H
The instrument must have been calibrated/adjusted at an ambient temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C.
The instrument must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes within
the operating temperature range specified.
The instrument must be in an environment with temperature, altitude,

humidity, and vibration with the operating limits described in these
specifications.
NOTE. Sampling Interface refers to both the electrical sampling module

compartments and the optical module compartments, unless otherwise specified.
Table A1: System Signal acquisition
Description
Characteristics
Number of input
channels
8 acquisition channels, maximum
Number of small sampling modules

compartments
4 compartments, for a total of 8 channels1
Number of large sampling modules

compartments
2 compartments, for a total of 2 channels1
A1
Table A1: System Signal acquisition (Cont.)

Description
Characteristics
Small Sampling Module Interface
TekprobeSampling Level 3. Hot switching is not permitted on this

interface.
Large Sampling Module Interface
TekprobeSampling Level 3. Hot switching is not permitted on this

interface.
Total actively-acquired channels 8.
Table A2: System Timebase
A2
Description
Characteristics
Sampling rate
DC-200 kHz maximum, dictated by trigger rate and actual holdoff

setting. If trigger rate is less than the maximum, or the requested
holdoff exceeds the minimum, the trigger rate and/or holdoff will dictate
the sampling rate.
Record length1
20, 50, 100, 250, 500, 1,000, 2,000, or 4,000 samples.
Horizontal scale
range
1 ps/div to 5 ms/div in 1, 2, 5 steps or 1 ps increments. Maximum

record lengths apply at certain ranges (per table, below).
Scale set to an integer multiple of:
Maximum record length
1 ps/div
1000
2 ps/div
2000
4 ps/div
4000
Horizontal position
range
50 ms maximum.
Horizontal resolution
10 fs minimum
Horizontal position
setting resolution
1 ps minimum
Horizontal modes
Two modes, Short Term Optimized and Locked to 10 MHz Reference.

The 10 MHz reference may be internal or external.
n Time internal accuracy, short term

optimized mode2
Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position

on same strobe line per table below. (Contribution from 80E04
sampling module is included in specification.)
Range
Time Interval Accuracy
20 ps/div
1 ps + 1% of interval
21 ps/div
8 ps + 0.1% of interval
Table A2: System Timebase (Cont.)

Description
Characteristics
n Time internal accuracy, locked to internal 10 MHz refere em

ence
modee2
Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position

on same strobe line per table below. Contribution from 80E04 sampling
module is included in specification.
Horizontal deskew
range and resolution
Range
Time Interval Accuracy
20 ps/div
1 ps + 1% of interval
21 ps/div
8 ps + 0.01% of interval
500 ps to +100 ns on any individual channel in 1 ps increments.
The total number of samples contained in a single acquired waveform record

(memory length in IEEE 1057, 2.2.1).
80E04 sampling module is included in this specification.
Table A3: System Trigger

Description
Characteristics
Trigger sources
External Direct Edge Trigger, External Precsaled Trigger, Internal Clock

Trigger, and Clock Recovery (with appropriately equipped optical
modules)
Auto/normal mode
Normal mode: wait for trigger

Auto mode: Trigger automatically generated after 100 ms time-out
Slope + or select
Edge + mode: Triggers on positive-slewing edge

Edge mode: Triggers on negative-slewing edge
High frequency on/off

select
High Frequency ON mode: Removes trigger hysteresis and improves

sensitivity. Should be used when trigger slew rate exceeds 1 V/ns.
High Frequency OFF mode: Retains trigger hysteresis and improves
noise rejection at low slew rates.
Metastability Reject
On/Off select
Metastability Reject On mode: Upon detection of trigger and holdoff

collision, time base will reject the sampled point.
Metastability Reject Off mode: Allows metastable points caused by
trigger/holdoff collisions to display.
Variable trigger hold

off range and resolution
Adjustable 5 ms to 50 ms in 0.5 ns increments. When External

Prescaled Trigger mode is used, holdoff period applies to the Prescaled
input divided by 8.
A3
Table A3: System Trigger (Cont.)

Description
Characteristics
External direct trigger

capabilities and
conditions
Direct edge triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel

connector with Holdoff, Level Adjust, Auto/Normal, High Frequency
On/Off, and Enhanced Triggering On/Off controls.
External direct trigger specifications apply only under the condition that
no other trigger signal is applied to respective connectors.
Short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference
specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external
10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector.
A4

input characteristics1
50 W input resistance, DC coupled only

input range
1.5 V (DC + peak AC) maximum input voltage

maximum operating
trigger signal2
1 Vpp

level range
Adjustable between 1.0 V
n External direct
trigger sensitivity3
100 mV, DC-3 GHz
External direct
trigger sensitivity
50 mV typical, DC-4 GHz

level resolution
1 mV
n External direct
trigger level accuracy
50 mV + 0.10 x level
n External direct
trigger delay jitter,
short term optimized
mode
1.5 ps RMS + 10 ppm of horizontal position, or better

delay jitter, short term
optimized mode (typical)
1.0 ps RMS + 5 ppm of horizontal position, typical
n External direct
delay jitter, locked to
internal 10 MHz reference mode
2.5 ps RMS + 0.10 ppm of horizontal position, or better
External direct delay

jitter, locked to internal 10 MHz reference
mode (typical)
1.6 ps RMS + 0.05 ppm of horizontal position, typical

minimum pulse width
167 ps, typical

Description
Characteristics

metastability
Metastability Reject on: Zero, typical

real time accessory
interface
TekprobeSMA, Levels 1 and 2. Hot switching is permitted on this real

time accessory interface.
External prescaled
trigger capabilities
Prescaled triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel

connector with Holdoff, Auto/Normal, Metastability Reject On/Off.
External prescaled trigger specifications apply only under the condition
that no other trigger source is applied to respective connectors.
Short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference
specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external
10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector.
External prescaled
trigger input characteristics
50 W AC coupled input resistance; divide-by-eight prescaler ratio, fixed

level zero volts
External prescaled
trigger absolute maximum input
2.5 Vpp
n External prescaled
trigger
r er sensitivity
e
The limits are as follows:

Frequency range
Sensitivity
2-3 GHz
800 mVpp
3- GHz
G z
3-10
6 mV
m pp
600
External prescaled
r er sensitivity
e
trigger
(typ-ical)
Frequency range
Sensitivity
10-12.5 GHz
1000 mVpp, typical
Short term optimized
mode
1.5 ps RMS + 10 ppm of horizontal position, or better
External prescaled
Short term optimized
mode (Typical)
1.0 ps RMS + 5 ppm of horizontal position, typical
internal 10 MHz reference mode
2.5 ps RMS + 0.10 ppm of horizontal position, or better
External prescaled
internal 10 MHz reference mode (Typical)
1.6 ps RMS + 0.05 ppm of horizontal position, typical
External prescaled
trigger metastability
Enhanced Triggering, Metastability Reject on: Zero, typical
A5

Description
Characteristics
Internal clock trigger

rates
Rate selectable at 25, 50, 100, and 200 kHz internally and is provided
to the trigger, to the TDR stimulus drives in small sampling module
interfaces, and to the Internal Clock Out connector on the front panel.
The input resistance at the external direct trigger input and the maximum input
voltage.
Maximum signal input for maintaining calibrated time base operation.
Section 4.10.2 in IEEE standard number 1057. The minimum signal levels required
for stable edge triggering of an acquisition.
Table A4: System Environmental

Description
Characteristics
Dynamics
Random vibration (operating):

0.10 g rms, from 5 to 500 Hz, 10 minutes each axis, (3 axis,
30 minutes total) operating.
Random vibration (nonoperating):
2.00 g rms, from 5 to 500 Hz, 10 minutes each axis, (3 axis,
30 minutes total) non-operating.
Atmospherics
Temperature:
Operating:
0 C to +40 C
0 C to +35 C for 80E0X modules on Tektronix part number
012-1569-00 2-meter extender
Nonoperating:
22 C to +60 C
Relative humidity:
Operating: 20% to 80%, with a maximum wet bulb temperature
of 29 C at or below +50 C (upper limits derates to 25% relative
humidity at +50 C, non-condensing)
Nonoperating (no floppy disk in floppy drive): 5% to 90%, with a
maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C at or below +60 C (upper
limits derates to 20% relative humidity at +60 C, non-condensing)
Altitude:
Operating: 3,048 m (10,000 ft.)
Nonoperating: 12,190 m (40,000 ft.)
Electrostatic discharge susceptibility
Up to 8 kV with no change to control settings, or impairment of normal

operation
Up to 15 kV with no damage that prevents recovery of normal operation
A6
Table A5: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Power consumption and cooling

Specifications
Characteristics
Power requirements
600 watts
Cooling requirements
Six fans with speed regulated by internal temperature sensors.

A 2 (51 mm) clearance must be maintained on the bottom, left side,
and right side of the instrument for forced air flow. It should never be
operated on a bench with the feet removed, nor have any object placed
nearby where it may be drawn against the air vents.
No clearance is required on the front, back, and top.
Table A6: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Display

Specifications
Characteristics
Display type
211.2 mm (wide) x 1.58.4 mm (high), 264 mm (10.4 inch) diagonal,

liquid crystal active matrix color display (LCD).
Display resolution
640 horizontal by 480 vertical pixels.
Pixel pitch
Pixels are 0.33 mm (horizontal) and 0.22 mm (vertical)
Table A7: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports

Specifications
Characteristics
Video outputs
Two 15pin Dsubminature connectors on the rear

panel. Useable to connect external monitors that
provide a duplicate of the primary display and/or a
second monitor on which to view other applications.
Support at least the basic requirements of the PC99 specification.
Parallel port
(IEEE 1284)
25-pin D-subminature connector on the rear panel. Supports the

following modes:
Standard mode, output only
Bi-directional, PS/2 compatible
Bi-directional Enhanced Parallel Port (IEEE 1284 standard, Mode 1
or Mode 2, v1.7
Bi-directional high speed Extended Capabilities Port (ECP)
Serial port
9-pin D-subminature serial-port connector using NS16C550 compatible

UARTs supporting transfer speeds up to 115.2 kbits/sec.
A7
Table A7: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports (Cont.)

Specifications
Characteristics
PS/2 Keyboard and

Mouse Interface
PS/2 compatible keyboard and mouse connectors.
LAN interface
RJ45 LAN connector supporting 10 base-T and 100 base-T
External audio connectors
External audio jacks for MIC IN and LINE OUT
USB interface
One USB connector (the second USB is disabled because of internal

use)
GPIB interface
Complies with IEEE 488.2
Internal clock trigger

out
Square wave out from 50 W. back termination synchronized to the TDR

internal clock drive signal. Refer to Trigger System Internal Clock.
Typical performance into 50 W termination:
0.20 to +0.20 V low level
+0.90 to +1.10 V high level
DC calibration output
DC voltage from low impedance drive, programmable to 1 mV over

1.25 V range maximum. Accuracy is 0.1 mV + 0.1%.
External 10 MHz
reference input
5 V maximum
Table A7: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Data storage
A8
Specifications
Characteristics
Floppy disk drive
3.5 in floppy disk, 1.44 Mbyte, compatable with DOS 3.3, or later,
format for storing reference waveforms, image files, and instrument
setups.
Hard disk drive capacity
w 6 Gbytes
Table A8: CSA8000 and TDS8000 Mechanical

Specifications
Characteristics
Construction material
Chassis: Aluminum alloy

Cosmetic covers: PC/ABS thermoplastic
Front panel: Aluminum alloy with PC/thermoplastic overlay
Module doors: Nickel plated stainless steel
Bottom cover: Vinyl clad sheet metal
Circuit boards: Glass-laminate.
Cabinet: Aluminum.
Weight
20.8 kg (45 lb. 12 oz.)
Overall Dimensions
Height 343 mm (13.5 in.)

Width 457 mm (18.0 in.)
Depth 419 mm (16.5 in.)
The dimensions do not include feet, rack mount kit, or protruding
connectors.
Overall mass, packaged product
36.3 kg (80 lb. 1 oz.)
Overall Dimensions,
packaged product
Height 622 mm (24.5 in.)

Width 711 mm (28.0 in.)
Depth 787 mm (31.0 in.)
Certifications
Table A9: Certifications and compliances
Category
Standards or description
EC Declaration of Conformity
EMC
Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility when configured with
sampling head modules designed for use with this instrument as identified in this manual.
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the
European Union:
EN 61326
EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,

Control and Laboratory use.
A9
Table A9: Certifications and compliances (cont.)

Category
Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
IEC 1000-4-2
Performance Criterion B1,2
IEC 1000-4-3
Performance Criterion A1
IEC 1000-4-4
Performance Criterion B1
IEC 1000-4-5
IEC 1000-4-6
Performance Criterion A1
IEC 1000-4-11
1
Performance Criteria C for USB keyboard and mouse. Note that operation of the
USB keyboard and mouse can be restored by unplugging and then
reconnecting the USB connector at the rear panel of the main instrument.
Horizontal timing susceptibility of the optical sampling modules and their

internal clock recovery trigger signals usually increase the horizontal timing
jitter when external electromagnetic fields are applied. For fields up to 3 V/m,
the increase in the horizontal high-frequency RMS jitter is typically less than
3 ps RMS of jitter, added using the square-root-of-the-sum-of-the-squares
method. An example follows:
If an 80C01-CR operating in clock-recovery trigger mode exhibits 3.5 ps RMS of
edge jitter, with no EMC field applied and for an ideal jitterless input, then for
applied fields up to 3 V/m the edge jitter, degradation would typically result in a
total RMS jitter of:
Jitter v 3.5ps 2 ) 3ps 2 + 4.61ps
EN 61000-3-2
AC Power Harmonic Current Emissions
Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrument is connected
to a test object.
Australia/New Zealand
Declaration of Conformity
EMC
Complies with EMC Framework per the following standard:

AS/NZS 2064.1/2
Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
General EMC
To ensure compliance with EMC requirements, only high quality shielded cables having a reliable,
continuous outer shield (braid & foil) with full coverage, low impedance connections to shielded
connector housings at both ends should be connected to this product.
EC Declaration of Conformity
Low Voltage
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the
European Union:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/69/EEC
EN 61010-1/A2:1995
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement

control and laboratory use.
U.S. Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory Listing,
mainframe
UL3111-1
Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment.
Canadian Certification,
mainframe
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,

control, and laboratory use.
A10
Table A9: Certifications and compliances (cont.)

Category
Installation (Overvoltage)
Category
Terminals on this product may have different installation (overvoltage) category designations. The
installation categories are:
Pollution Degree
CAT III
Distribution-level mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this level is

typically in a fixed industrial location.
CAT II
Local-level mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances, portable
tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cord-connected.
CAT I
Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.
A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product.
Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external.
Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 1
No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Products in

this category are generally encapsulated, hermetically sealed, or
located in clean rooms.
Pollution Degree 2
Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a

temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be
expected. This location is a typical office/home environment.
Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of
service.
Pollution Degree 3
Conductive pollution, or dry, nonconductive pollution that becomes

conductive due to condensation. These are sheltered locations
where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled. The area is
protected from direct sunshine, rain, or direct wind.
Pollution Degree 4
Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive

dust, rain, or snow. Typical outdoor locations.
Safety Certification Compliance

Equipment Type
Test and measuring
Safety Class
Class 1 (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex H) grounded product
Overvoltage Category
Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex J)
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010-1). Note: Rated for indoor use only.
A11
A12
Appendix B: Automatic Measurements Supported

All measurements are based on the power level, the voltage level, or the time
locations of edges within each acquisition. Tables B1 through B4 define the
measurements this instrument supports within four categories: Amplitude,
Timing, Area, and Eye Pattern/Optical.
Refer to Figure B1 on page B6 to interpret the definitions of waveforms in
the categories Amplitude, Timing, and Area. Refer to Figure B2 on page B7
to interpret the definitions of waveform in the category Eye Pattern/Optical.
Amplitude Measurements
Table B1: Supported amplitude measurements
Name
Category and Definition

AC RMS
Amplitude measurement. The AC RMS valued measured over the entire waveform or
gated region.
Sqrt
Amplitude
Sxdy X
2
Amplitude measurement. The high value less the low value measured over the entire
waveform or gated region.
Amplitude = HighLow
Cycle Mean
Amplitude measurement. The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or
the first cycle in the gated region.
Cycle RMS
Amplitude measurement. The true RMS voltage over the first cycle in the waveform
or the first cycle in the gated region.
Gain
Amplitude measurement. The ratio of amplitude measurements for a source and

destination waveform. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Gain +
Amplitude source 2
Amplitude source 1
High
Amplitude measurement. The value used as 100% whenever High Ref, Mid Ref, and
Low Ref values are needed (as in fall time and rise time measurements). Calculated using
either the min/max or the histogram mean or mode method. See High/Low Method on
page 369. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Mid
Amplitude measurement. The midpoint level between the 0% and 00% amplitude
levels. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Mid +
High ) Low
2
B1
Table B1: Supported amplitude measurements (Cont.)

Name

Low
Amplitude measurement. The value used as 0% whenever High Ref, Mid Ref, and
Low Ref values are needed (as in fall time and rise time measurements). May be
calculated using either the min/max or the histogram mean or mode method. See
High/Low Method on page 369. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Maximum
Amplitude measurement. The maximum amplitude. Typically the most positive peak
voltage. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Mean
Amplitude measurement. The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated
region.
Minimum
Amplitude measurement. The minimum amplitude. Typically the most negative peak
voltage. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Negative Overshoot
Amplitude measurement. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.

NegativeOvershoot + LowMin
Amplitude
100%
Peak to Peak
Amplitude measurement. The absolute difference between the maximum and

minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region.
Positive Overshoot
Amplitude measurement. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.

PositiveOvershoot +
RMS
MaxHigh
Amplitude
100%
Amplitude measurement. The true RMS voltage over the entire waveform or gated
region.
Area Measurements
Table B2: Supported area measurements
Name

Area
Area measurement. The area over the entire waveform or gated region in vertical units over
horizontal units, such as volt-seconds and watt-seconds. Area measured above ground is
positive; area below ground is negative. Algorithm follows:
if Start = End then return the (interpolated) value at Start.
Otherwise,
Area =
Cycle Area
B2
End
Waveform(t)dt
Start
Area measurement. The area over the first cycle in the waveform, or the first cycle in
the gated region, vertical units over horizontal units, such as volt-seconds and
watt-seconds. Area measured above ground is positive; area below ground is negative.
Eye Pattern and Optical Measurements

Table B3: Supported eye-pattern/optical measurements
Name

Average Optical Power
Average Optical Power
dBm
Eye pattern/optical measurement. This measurement is not actually is taken on an

acquired waveform, rather it is taken by the hardware in the optical sampling module.
Average Optical Power only measures optical channels, taken at a rate of one reading
per second.
Crossing %
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The eye crossing point as a percentage of eye

height.
Crossing % = 100*[(PCross1mean PBasemean )/(PTopmean PBasemean )]
Duty Cycle Distortion
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The peak-to-peak time variation of the 1st eye
crossing measured at the MidRef as a percent of the eye period.
DCD (sec) = 100% x TDCDpp /(TCross2mean TCross2mean )
Extinction Ratio
Eye pattern/optical measurement. Ratio of eye top to base.

Ext
x Ratio = PTopmean //PBasemean
Note: Optical sampling modules may subtract the dark current voltage from the
PTopmean and PBasemean values. Check the documentation for your sampling module.
Extinction Ratio %
Eye pattern/optical measurement. Ratio of eye base to top in %.

Ext
x Ratio % = 100*(PBase
*(
mean //PTopmean )
Note: Optical sampling modules may subtract the dark current voltage from the
Extinction Ratio dB
Eye pattern/optical measurement. Ratio of eye top to base in db.

x Ratio dB = 10*Log(PTop
* (
/
Ext
mean /PBase
mean )
Note:
N
e O
Optical sampling
m
m
modules
e m
may subtract
r thee dark
r current
rre voltagee from
fr m thee
Eye Height
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The eye height in watts or volts.

Eye Height = (PTopmean 3*PTopsigma ) (PBasemean + 3*PBasesigma )
Eye Width
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The eye width in seconds.

Eye Width = (TCross2mean 3*TCross2sigma ) (TCross1mean + 3*TCross1sigma )
Jitter RMS
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The RMS value of the edge jitter in the current
horizontal units.1
Jitter RMS = TCross1sigma
Jitter PkPk
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The peak-to-peak value for the edge jitter in the
current horizontal units.1
Jitter PP = TCross1PP
B3
Table B3: Supported eye-pattern/optical measurements (Cont.)

Name

Noise Pk-Pk
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The peak-to-peak value of the noise of the top or
base of the signal as specified by the user. 1
Noise PkPk = PToppkpk or PBasepkpk
Noise RMS
Eye pattern/optical measurement. The RMS value of the noise of the top or base of
the signal as specified by the user.1
Noise RMS = PTopsigma or PBasesigma
Quality Factor
Eye pattern/optical measurement. Ratio of eye size to noise.

Quality Factor = (PTopmean PBasemean )/(PTopsigma + PBasesigma )
S/N Ratio
Eye pattern/optical measurement. Ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise of the
top or base of the signal as specified by the user.1
S/N Ratio = (PTop PBase)/(PTopsigma or PBasesigma )
B4
You can customize these eye/optical measurements. First, display the Meas Setup dialog box from the UI application
Setup menu. In the dialog box, select your eye pattern/optical measurement, then select the Region tab.
Then:
To choose between jitter at the eye crossing or the mid ref crossing, use the Jitter At selection to choose Eye Cross
or Mid Ref for your jitter measurement.
To choose between noise at PTop or PBase, use the Noise At selection to choose High (top) or Low (base) for your
noise measurement.
Timing Measurements
Table B4: Supported timing measurements
Name

Burst Width
Timing measurement. The duration of a burst. It is the time from the first midref
crossing in the burst to the last. Measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Delay
Timing measurement. The time between the MidRef crossings of two different traces
or the gated region of the traces.
Fall Time
Timing measurement. The time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the
waveform or gated region to fall from a High Ref value (default = 90%) to a Low Ref
value (default =10%) of its final value.
Frequency
Timing measurement. The frequency taken for the first cycle in the waveform or in
the gated region. The reciprocal of the period. Measured in Hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz =
1 cycle per second.
Negative Crossing
Timing measurement. The distance between the trigger and the first positive crossing
of the MidRef (default 50%) amplitude point for a pulse. Measured over the first pulse
in the waveform or in the gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle
Timing measurement. The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period
expressed as a percentage. Measured over the first cycle in the waveform or in the
gated region.
NegativeDutyCycle +
NegativeWidth
Period
100%
Negative Width
Timing measurement. Time of the first pulse in the waveform or in the gated region.
Distance (time) between MidRef (default 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse.
Period
Timing measurement. Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to complete in
the waveform or in the gated region. The reciprocal of frequency. Measured in
seconds.
Phase
Timing measurement. The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time.
Expressed in degrees, where 360_ comprise one waveform cycle.
Positive Crossing
Timing measurement. The distance between the trigger and the first positive crossing
of the MidRef (default 50%) amplitude point for a pulse. Measured over the first pulse
in the waveform or in the gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle
Timing measurement. Measured using the first cycle in the waveform or in the gated
region. The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
PositiveDutyCycle + PositiveWidth
Period
100%
Positive Width
Timing measurement. Measured over the first pulse in the waveform or in the gated
region. The distance (time) between MidRef (default 50%) amplitude points of a
positive pulse.
Rise time
Timing measurement. Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the
waveform or gated region to rise from a Low Ref value (default = 10%) to a High Ref
value (default = 90%) of its final value.
B5
Levels Used in Taking Amplitude, Timing, and Area Measurements

Refer to Figure B1 and the descriptions that follow to interpret the definitions
of waveforms in categories Amplitude, Timing, and Area.
High
HighRef
MidRef
LowRef
Low
Figure B1: Levels used to determine measurements

High the value used as the 100% level in amplitude measurements, such as
Peak and +Overshoot. High is also used to help derive the HighRef, MidRef,
MidRef2, and LowRef values.
Low the value used as the 0% level in amplitude measurements, such as Peak
and Overshoot. Low is also used to help derive the HighRef, MidRef, MidRef2,
and LowRef values.
Depending on the measurement, you may be able to select how the High and
Low values are determined; see High/Low Tracking on page 368 for details.
HighRef the waveform high reference level, used in such measurements as fall
time and rise time. Typically set to 90%. You can choose how this level is set;
see Reference Levels Method on page 370.
MidRef the waveform middle reference level used in such measurements as
Period and Duty Cycle. Typically set to 50%. You can choose how this level is
set; see Reference Levels Method on page 370.
LowRef the waveform low reference level. Used in fall and rise time
calculations. Typically set to 10%. You can choose how this level is set; see
Reference Levels Method on page 370.
Mid2Ref the middle reference level for a second waveform (or the second
middle reference of the same waveform). Used in two-waveform time measure-
B6
ments, such as the Delay and Phase measurements. You can choose how this
level is set; see Reference Levels Method on page 370.
Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements

All eye-diagram measurements are based on the power level, the voltage level, or
the time locations of edges within each acquisition.
Figure B2 shows an eye-diagram and the areas from which values are taken that
are used to calculate measurements.
PTop
TCross1
TCross2
PCross2
PCross1
PBase
Eye
Aperture
Figure B2: Eye-diagram and optical values
P Values
The P values include the mean and standard deviation of the vertical location of
PTop and PBase. These areas are used with a specified sample size to statistically measure the following values:
H
PTopmean, the mean value of PTop
PTopsigma, the standard deviation of PTop
B7
PBasemean, the mean value of PBase within the Eye Aperture1
PBasesigma, the standard deviation of PBase within the Eye Aperture1
1The
Eye Aperture defaults to the center 20% of the interval from TCross1
to Tcross2 but is settable from 0% to 100%. (In the Measurement Setup
dialog box first select an eye measurement, and then select the Region tab.)
T1 Values
T2 Values
DCD Values
B8
The T1 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the leftmost
crossing point. These areas are used to establish the following directions:
H
TCross1mean, the horizontal mean of the left crossing point at TCross1
TCross1sigma, the horizontal standard deviation of the left crossing point

at TCross1
TCross1pk-pk, the horizontal peak-to-peak deviation of the left crossing point

at TCross1
PCross1mean, the vertical mean of the left crossing point at PCross1
The T2 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the rightmost
crossing point. These areas are used to establish the following directions:
H
TCross2mean, the horizontal mean of the right crossing point at TCross2
TCross2sigma, the horizontal standard deviation of the right crossing point

at TCross2
TCross2pk-pk, the horizontal peak-to-peak deviation of the right crossing

point at TCross2
The DCD values are horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing
point at 50% of the eye height. These areas are used to establish the DCDpk-pk,
the horizontal peak-to-peak deviation of the left crossing point at half the height
of the eye.
Appendix C: Insert Sampling Module User Manuals Here

You can insert the User manuals for the electrical and/or optical sampling
modules here.
C1
Appendix C: Sampling Module User Manuals
C2
Glossary
Accuracy
The closeness of the indicated value to the true value.
Acquisition
The process of sampling signals from input channels, digitizing the samples
into data points, and assembling the data points into a waveform record. The
waveform record is stored in memory. The trigger marks time zero in that
process.
Active cursor
The cursor that moves when you turn the general purpose knob. It is
represented in the display by a solid line.
Active (or Selected) view
The view in multiple view displays that is currently targeted for adjustment
by the horizontal controls. The front-panel button of the active view is
always lit amber.
Aliasing
A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high
frequencies or fast transitions. A condition that occurs when a sampling
instrument digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to
reproduce the input signal. The waveform displayed on screen may have a
lower frequency than the actual input signal.
Annotations
Lines displayed on screen to indicate measurement reference levels and
points that an automatic measurement is using to derive the measurement
value.
Attenuation
The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an
attenuating device such as a probe or an external attenuator. That is, the ratio
of the input measure to the output measure. For example, a 10X attenuator
will attenuate, or reduce, the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10.
Automatic measurement
An automatic measurement of a parameter and its numeric readout that the
instrument takes and updates directly from a channel, math, or reference
waveform in real time, without operator intervention.
Automatic trigger mode
A trigger mode that causes the instrument to automatically acquire if
triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period.
Glossary1
Glossary
Autoset
A function of the instrument that attempts to automatically produce a stable
waveform of usable size. Autoset sets up the acquisition controls based on the
characteristics of the selected waveform. A successful autoset will produce a
coherent and stable waveform display.
Average acquisition mode
In this mode, the instrument displays and updates a waveform that is the
averaged result of several waveform acquisitions. Averaging reduces the
apparent noise. The instrument acquires data as in sample mode and then
averages it a user-specified number of averages.
Bandwidth
The highest frequency signal the instrument can acquire with no more than
3 dB ( .707) attenuation of the original (reference) signal.
BER
An acronym for Bit Error Ratio (or Rate). The principal measure of quality
of a digital transmission system. BER is defined as:
BER = Number of Errors/Total Number of Bits
BER is usually expressed as a negative exponent. For example, a BER of
107 means that 1 bit out of 107 bits is in error.
BER floor
A limiting of the bit-error-ratio in a digital system as a function of received
power due to the presence of signal degradation mechanisms or noise.
Bit error
An incorrect bit. Also known as a coding violation.
Channel
An input that connects a signal or attaches a network or transmission line to
sampling modules for acquisition of channel waveforms by the instrument.
Channel/Probe deskew
A relative time delay that is settable for a channel. Setting deskew lets you
align signals to compensate for signals that may come in from cables of
differing length.
Channel icon
The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around
which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed.
This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V; otherwise, it is ground plus
offset.
Channel number
The number assigned to a specific signal input channel of an installed
Glossary2
Glossary
sampling module. Assignment of channel numbers is described in Maximum

Configuration on page 110.
Channel waveforms
Waveforms resulting from signals input into sampling-module channels and
digitized and acquired by the instrument. See Live Waveforms.
Control knob
see Knob
Coupling
The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power
or information can be transferred from one to the other. This instrument
supports direct coupling only at its inputs; the user must provide any
alternate coupling (ac, frequency filtering) externally.
Cursors
Any of three styles of paired markers that you can use to make measurements
between two waveform locations. The instrument displays the values (expressed
in vertical or horizontal units) of the position of the active cursor and the
distance between the two cursors.
Delay time
See Horizontal Delay.
Digitizing
The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a
set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific
points in time. Digitizing is composed of two steps: sampling and quantizing.
Display system
The part of the instrument that displays the three graticules, one each for the
Main, Mag1, and Mag2 time bases, the waveforms, and other display related
elements (waveform labels, cursors, test masks, measurement annotations,
etc.).
Dragging
The act of changing your selection either by clicking (mouse) or touching
(touchscreen) a point on the screen and pulling across the screen while
holding down the key (mouse) or maintaining contact with your finger
(touchscreen).
Glossary3
Glossary
Error detection
Checking for errors in data transmission. A calculation is made on the data
being sent and the results are sent along with it. The receiving station then
performs the same calculation and compares its results with those sent. Each
data signal conforms to specific rules of construction so that departures from
this construction in the received signals can be detected. Any data detected
as being in error is either deleted from the data delivered to the destination,
with or without an indication that such deletion has taken place, or delivered
to the destination together with an indication that it is in error.
Error rate
The ratio of the number of data units in error to the total number of data
units.
Edge trigger
Triggering occurs when the instrument detects the source passing through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction (the trigger slope). This
instrument supports only edge triggering. All trigger sources must be
external, except when using clock recovery (available as an option with
optical sampling modules) or the internal clock.
Envelope acquisition mode
A mode in which the instrument acquires and displays a waveform that
shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions.
Equivalent-time sampling (ET)
A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many
repetitions of the event. This instrument uses a type of equivalent-time
sampling called sequential equivalent-time sampling. See Sequential
equivalent-time sampling.
Gated measurements
A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion
of the waveform. You define the area of interest using measurement gates.
General-purpose knob
The large front-panel knob on the upper-right corner of the front panel. You
can use it to change the value of the control or element that currently has
focus. It can adjust the cursors.
GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus)
An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple
instruments in a network under the control of a controller. Also known as
IEEE 488 bus. It transfers data with eight parallel data lines, five control
lines, and three handshake lines.
Graticule
A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes. You
can use it to visually measure waveform parameters.
Glossary4
Glossary
Graticule labels
Each graticule displays three labels. The upper and lower left labels indicate
the amplitude level at each of the upper and lower boundaries of the graticule
edges. These levels are based on the vertical scale and offset of the selected
waveform. The lower right label is horizontal scale factor of the selected
waveform expressed in units per division.
High
The value used as the 100% level in amplitude measurements, such as Peak
and +Overshoot. See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude, Timing, and Area
Measurements on page B6 for more details.
HighRef
The waveform high reference level, used in such measurements as fall time
and rise time. Typically set to 90%. See Levels Used in Amplitude, Timing,
and Area Measurements on page B6 for more details.
Holdoff, trigger
A specified amount of time after a trigger signal that elapses before the
trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal. Trigger holdoff helps ensure
a stable display.
Horizontal Acquisition Window
A common time window or range that is applied to all channels in parallel to
determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform
record. Trigger and horizontal controls determine the duration of this
window and its placement in the incoming signal.
Horizontal bar cursors
The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the amplitude
parameters of a waveform. The instrument displays the value of both cursors
with respect to ground and the amplitude value between the bars.
Horizontal delay time
The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data. The time is
set indirectly by the Horizontal reference setting and the horizontal position
settings. See Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on
page 353.
Horizontal reference point
The point about which waveforms are expanded or contracted horizontally
when horizontal scale adjustments are made. The horizontal reference point
remains anchored as the rest of the waveform grows or shrinks around it.
Interpolation
The way the instrument calculates additional values to display when the
acquired record length is less than 500 points. The instrument has two
interpolation options: linear or sin(x)/x interpolation.
Glossary5
Glossary
Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight-line fit between the

actual values acquired. Sin(x)/x computes record points in a curve fit
between the actual values acquired. It assumes all the interpolated points fall
in their appropriate point in time on that curve.
Icon
See Channel Icon.
Initialize
Setting the instrument to a completely known, default condition by pressing
executing a Default Setup.
Internal clock
A trigger source that is synchronized to the internal clock, with a selectable
repetition rate. It is most often used with TDR to synchronize the generation
of TDR step pulses with subsequent acquisition.
Knob
A rotary control.
Live Waveforms
Waveforms that can update as the acquisition system acquires data. Channel
waveforms are live waveforms; reference waveforms are not. Math
waveforms are live if they contain live waveforms in their expressions:
C1 + R1 defines a live math waveform; R1 + R2 does not.
Low
The value used as 0% in automated measurements (whenever high ref, mid
ref, and low ref values are needed ,as in fall time and rise time measurements). May be calculated using one of three methods. See High/Low
Tracking Method on page 369 for details more details.
LowRef
The waveform low reference level. Used in fall and rise time calculations.
Typically set to 10%. See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude, Timing, and
Area Measurements on page B6 for more details.
Math Waveform
A waveform defined by a combination of one or more operands (channel
waveforms, reference waveforms, and automatic measurement scalars). Math
waveforms may also contain math operators and functions.
Measurement
See Automatic Measurement.
Measurement statistics
The accumulation of a history of individual measurement readouts, showing
the mean and standard deviation of a selected number of samples.
Glossary6
Glossary
Measurement updating
The process of automatically adjusting the measurement parameters to reflect
changes in the waveform targeted by an automatic measurement.
MidRef
The waveform middle reference level used in such measurements as Period
and Duty Cycle. Typically set to 50%. See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude,
Timing, and Area Measurements on page B6 for more details.
Mid2Ref
The middle reference level for a second waveform (or the second middle
reference of the same waveform). Used in two waveform time measurements, such as the Delay and Phase measurements. See Levels Used in
Taking Amplitude, Timing, and Area Measurements on page B6 for more
details.
Persistence
The amount of time a data point remains displayed. There are three
persistence modes available in the instrument: Variable, Infinite, and Color
Grading.
Pixel
A visible point on the display. The instrument display is 640 pixels wide by
480 pixels high.
Pop-up menu
A menu that displays when you right click an application element, such as a
channel or its icon, a measurement or other readout. Usually provides quick
access to settings related to the object clicked.
Probe
An instrument input device.
Quantizing
The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled, such as a
voltage, to a digital value.
Real-time sampling
An alternate sampling mode where the instrument samples to completely fill
a waveform record from a single trigger event. This instrument does not use
real time sampling; it samples sequentially. See Sequential equivalent-time
sampling on page Glossary8.
Record length
The specified number of samples in a waveform.
Reference memory
Memory in an instrument used to store waveforms or settings. You can use
that waveform data later for processing. The instrument saves the data even
when the instrument is turned off or unplugged.
Glossary7
Glossary
Reference waveforms
Waveforms that are static, not live (see live waveforms). Reference
waveforms are channel or math waveforms that you save to references or to
files in the instrument file system. Once saved, they do not update.
Sample acquisition mode
The instrument creates a record point by saving the first sample during each
acquisition interval. That is the default mode of the acquisition.
Sample interval
The time interval between successive samples in a time base display. The
time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time, not real
time.
Sampling
The process of capturing an analog input, such as a voltage, at a discrete
point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized.
Select button
A button that changes which of the two cursors is active.
Selected waveform
The waveform which is affected by vertical position and scale adjustments.
One of the channel selector buttons lights amber to indicate the currently
selected waveform.
Sequential equivalent-time sampling
A type of equivalent-time sampling in which one sample is taken per
acquisition, with each sample skewed incrementally with respect to an
external trigger event. This instrument acquires using sequential equivalenttime sampling.
Saved waveform
A collection of sampled points that constitute a single waveform that is
saved in any one on reference locations R1 - R8 or to the file system.
Slope
The direction at a point on a waveform. You can calculate the direction by
computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity (Y) to the
change in the horizontal quantity. The two values are rising and falling.
Time base
The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis
attributes of a waveform View. The time base determines when and how long
to acquire record points.
Trigger
An event that marks time zero in the waveform record. It results in acquisition of the waveform as specified by the time base.
Glossary8
Glossary
Trigger level
The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger (on edge
trigger mode).
Uptime
The number of hours the instrument has been powered on.
Vertical bar cursors
The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a
waveform record. The instrument displays the value of both cursors with
respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars.
Vertical Acquisition Window
The range of values the acquisition system can acquire. The maximum
vertical size is set by the operating range of the sampling module installed,
and that of any probe installed on the sampling module. For example, an
80E00 sampling module set to its maximum 100mV/div scale yields a
10-division vertical acquisition window of 1V.
The vertical offset determines where in the operating range of the A/D
converter (sampler) is the signal positioned relative to ground. Changing
vertical position will simply change the space on the screen where the data is
displayed.
View
Any one of the three waveform displays the instrument provides: Main,
Mag1, and Mag2. Each view has its own graticule and time base. The
instrument always displays the Main view; the Mag1 and Mag2 views can be
added and removed from the display using the View buttons on the front
panel.
Virtual keypad
A pop-up pad that lets you enter specific numeric values for the control from
which it is popped up.
Virtual keyboard
A pop-up keyboard that lets you click to type characters for the control from
which it is opened, such as in the vertical scale and offset controls found in
the Control bar at the bottom of the display.
Waveform
The visible representation of an input signal or combination of signals.
Waveforms can be channel, reference, or math waveforms.
Waveform cursors
The cursor mode that presents two cursors you position to measure both the
time and amplitude parameters if a waveform record. The instrument
displays the time of both cursors with respect to the trigger and the time
between the cursors. The instrument also displays the value of both cursors
with respect to the waveform ground and between the cursors.
Glossary9
Glossary
Waveform database
A collection of sequentially acquired waveforms.
WfmDB
See Waveform database.
Windows 98
The underlying operating system on which this instrument runs.
YT format
The conventional display format. It shows the amplitude of a waveform
record (on the vertical axis) as it varies over time (on the horizontal axis).
Glossary10
Index
Symbols
+Overshoot measurement, B2
A
AC RMS measurement, B1
Accessories
list, 135
optional, 136
standard, 135
Accuracy, Glossary1
Acquiring Waveforms, 33
Acquisition, Glossary1
cycle, 328
horizontal delay, 327
horizontal delay time with, Glossary5
how to start and stop, 325
input channels and digitizers, 326
modes for starting and stopping, 321
overview, 325
preventing aliasing, 322
record, 327
record length, 327
sample interval, 327
sampling (see Sampling), 326328
set Stop mode & action, 324
time base, Glossary8
trigger point, 327
triggering, 337
Acquisition control
background, 325
overview, 319
Acquisition controls
keys to using, 320
vs. Display controls, 352
why use, 320
Acquisition mode
Average, Glossary2
Envelope, Glossary4
Sample, Glossary8
Acquisition modes
description of, 320
how to set, 323
Acquisition settings, purpose, 320
Active cursor, Glossary1
Address, Tektronix, xv
Aliasing, 322, Glossary1
Amplitude measurement, B1
Annotations, Glossary1
Application toolbar, 3115
Area measurement, B2
Attenuation, Glossary1
Attenuators, external, use of, 36
Auto, trigger mode, 339
Automatic measurement, Glossary1
+Overshoot, B2
Overshoot, B2
AC RMS, B1
Amplitude, B1
Area, B2
Average Optical Power, B3
Burst Width, B5
Crossing %, B3
Cycle Area, B2
Cycle Mean, B1
Cycle RMS, B1
Delay, B5
Duty Cycle Distortion, B3
Extinction Ratio, B3
Extinction Ratio (%), B3
Extinction Ratio (DB), B3
Eye Height, B3
Eye Width, B3
Fall Time, B5
Frequency, B5
Gain, B1
High, B1
Jitter Pk-Pk, B3
Jitter RMS, B3
Low, B2
Maximum, B2
Mean, B2
Mid, B1
Minimum, B2
Negative Crossing, B5
Negative Duty Cycle, B5
Negative Width, B5
Noise Pk-Pk, B4
Noise RMS, B4
Peak to Peak, B2
Period, B5
Phase, B5
Positive Crossing, B5
Positive Duty Cycle, B5
Positive Width, B5
Quality Factor, B4
Rise Time, B5
Index1
Index
RMS, B2
S/N Ratio, B4
Automatic measurements, 366
amplitude category, B1
annotations, 366
area category, B2
behavior with databases, 368
categories for selection, 368
database as source requirement/exclusion, 367
databases as sources, 367
dual waveform, 368
eye pattern/optical category, B3
eyepattern and optical, 367
High and Low levels defined, B6
high/low tracking, 368
methods for, 369
how to localize (gates), 375
how to take, 372
independent characterization of, 367
levels used in taking, B6, B7
list of supported, B1
number available, 368
reference level methods, 370
reference levels defined, B6
reference levels defined (eye pattern/optical), B7
signal-type, 368
sources available, 368
statistics on, 367
usage limitations, 367
whats measured, 366
why use, 366
Automatic trigger mode, Glossary1
Autoset, 35, Glossary2
How to execute, 397
how to execute, 311
mask-specific, 3124
overview, 313
Average acquisition mode, Glossary2
Average Optical Power measurement, B3
B
Back up, procedure, 115
Bandwidth, Glossary2
Bar
Controls, 26
Measurements, 26
Menu, 26
Readouts, 26
Status, 26
Tool, 26
Waveform, 26
Index2
BER, Glossary2
BER floor, Glossary2
Bit error, Glossary2
Burst Width measurement, B5
Button, SELECT, Glossary8
C
CD, instrument software, 13
Certifications, for instrument, A9
Channel, Glossary2
icon, Glossary2
number, Glossary2
waveforms, Glossary3
Channel icon, Glossary2
Channelprobe deskew, Glossary2
Channels
in sampling modules, 326
maximum configuration, 110
shared horizontal window, 319
shared parameters, illustrated, 319
Cleaning, instrument, how to, 3153
Cleaning and inspection
exterior, 3153
flat panel display, 3153
Clipping, 36
Clock, internal, Glossary6
Clock recovery, 337
trigger source, 339
Communication, remote, 3121
Compensation, 383388
how to perform, 384
when installing/moving sampling modules, 19
Configuration
instrument, 17
maximum channels available, 110
software installation, 115
Connectors
DIRECT, 339, 341
locations and purpose, 111
PRESCALE, 339, 341
Contacting Tektronix, xv
Controls
initialize, Glossary6
knob, Glossary6
selected waveform, 37
Controls bar, 26
Coupling, Glossary3
Crossing % measurement, B3
CSA8000, description, 11
Cursor, measurements, 377379
Cursor Measurements, how to set sources for, 382
Index
Cursor measurements
how to take, 381
sources, 378
whats measured, 377
why use, 377
Cursors, 377, Glossary3
constrained by the display, 378
default measurement source, 378
horizontal bars, Glossary5
measure horizontally from the trigger point, 379
types, 378
units and readout names, 380
use with independent sources, 379
vertical bars, Glossary9
waveform, Glossary9
what time cursors measure (illustration), 380
Cycle Area measurement, B2
Cycle Mean measurement, B1
Cycle RMS measurement, B1
D
Dark-Level compensation, how to perform, 387
Data, controlling input and output, 3101
Data Input and Output, 3101
Database, waveform, Glossary10
Databases, Waveform, 3139
Delay measurement, B5
Delay time, Glossary3
horizontal, Glossary5
Description
key features, 11
product, 11
Deskew, Glossary2
how to, 386
Diagnostics
procedure, 120
system, 117
Digitizing, Glossary3
process, defined, 326328
Display
customizable attributes of, 359
defined, 348
elements of, 348
flexible control, 349
graticule, defined, 348
horizontal reference, defined, 348
horizontal scale readout, defined, 348
how to customize, 362
how to set style of, 361
limit readouts, defined, 348
mapMain & Mag views, 29
mapMain view, 28
mode
Infinite Persistence, 360
Normal, 360
Variable Persistence, 360
multiple views, 349
preview field, defined, 348
printing, 3120
keys to using, 350
system, Glossary3
time base views, defined, 348
touchscreen, defined, 349
customizing, 358
waveform, 26
why use, 349
zoom, 349
Display controls
purpose, 349
vs. Acquisition controls, 352
Display menu
Dots, 360
Vectors, 360
Display screen, overview of, 347
Display settings
Horizontal position, 353
horizontal reference, 353
Displaying waveforms, 347
Documentation
online, 21
online help system, 3145
Dots, 360
Dots, Display menu, 360
Dragging, mouse or touchscreen, Glossary3
Duty Cycle Distortion measurement, B3
E
Edge trigger, Glossary4
Electrical modules, installation, 18
Electrical sampling modules, specifications, where to
find, A1
Envelope acquisition mode, Glossary4
Environmental requirements, installation, 17
Equivalent-time sampling, random, Glossary4
Error detection, Glossary4
Error rate, Glossary4
ESD
& sampling modules, 36
and trigger source inputs, 341
Exporting waveforms, 3116
Extinction Ratio (%) measurement, B3
Extinction Ratio (DB) measurement, B3
Index3
Index
Extinction Ratio measurement, B3

Eye Height measurement, B3
Eye Width measurement, B3
F
Fall Time measurement, B5
Fiberchannel, standards supported, 3124
Firmware, upgrade, 13
Flat panel display, cleaning, 3153
FrameScan Acquisition
keys to using, 330
FrameScan acquisition
advantages, 329
cycle, 330
How to catch bit error, 335
how works (illustrated), 331
overview, 329
why use, 329
Envelope, usage limitations, 330
FrameScan Mode, How to acquire in, 332
Frequency measurement, B5
Front panel, map, 27
Functional tests, procedure, 123
G
Gain measurement, B1
Gated measurements, Glossary4
General purpose knob, Glossary4
Gigabit Ethernet, 3124
GPIB, Glossary4
Graticule, Glossary4
labels, Glossary5
one per view, 351
H
Hard drive, operating system reinstallation, 117
Hardware and operating system, procedure, 132
High, Glossary5
High frequency triggering, 342
High measurement, B1
High/Low tracking, 368
methods for, 369
HighRef, measurement level, Glossary5
Histograms
continuous operation of, 3135
counting, 3135
editing features, 3134
Index4
in recalled setups, 3135

size, 3135
supported statistics, table of, 3138
taking, 3134
to take, 3136
valid sources of, 3134
why use, 3134
Holdoff, triggering, 342
usable limits, 343
Holdoff, trigger, Glossary5
Bit error, to capture, 335
Horizontal
Bar cursors, Glossary5
delay time, Glossary5
discussion of parameters, 316
interrelation of parameters, 317
position, 37
scaling, 34
set up procedure, 38
time range (acquisition window), Glossary5
Horizontal Reference, usage limitations, 330
Horizontal acquisition window, Glossary5
control set up, 39
what determines, 316
Horizontal delay, defined, 327
Horizontal position, relative to Horizontal Ref, 353
Horizontal reference, relative to horizontal position,
353
Horizontal reference point, Glossary5
Horizontal scale, why use, 34
Horizontal set up, purpose, 34
Horizontal settings
with channel waveforms, 352
with math waveforms, 352
with reference waveforms, 352
I
Incoming inspection, 119
perform compensation, 121
perform diagnostics, 120
perform hardware and operating system test, 132
perform the functional tests, 123
test equipment required by, 119
Infinite Persistence, display mode, 360
Initialize, Glossary6
Input/Output (front panel), map, 210
Input/Output (rear panel), map, 211
Inspection and cleaning
exterior, 3153
flat panel display, 3153
Index
Installation, 17
environmental requirements, 17
incoming inspection procedure, 119
sampling modules, 18
compensation requirements, 19
software installation, 115
Instrument
accessories list, 135
acquisition overview, 25
cleaning, 3153
functional model, 23
installation, 17
key features, 11
models, 11
optional accessories list, 136
options list, 135
package contents, 15
product description, 11
standard accessories list, 135
Interpolation, Glossary5
description of modes, 360
Introduction, to this manual, xiii
J
Jitter Pk-Pk measurement, B3
Jitter RMS measurement, B3
K
Keyboard, virtual, Glossary9
Keypad, virtual, Glossary9
Knob, Glossary6
general purpose, Glossary4
Trigger MAIN LEVEL, 338
L
Level, trigger, 338
Linear interpolation, 360, Glossary6
Linearity, measurement errors, 36
Live waveforms, Glossary6
Low, Glossary6
Low measurement, B2
LowRef, measurement level, Glossary6
M
Mag1 and Mag2, Views, 353
Manuals
part numbers, 135
related, xiii
Map
acquisition process, 25
documentation, 22
front panel, 27
input/output (front panel), 210
input/output (rear panel), 211
system, 23
user interface, 26
waveform display, 28
Mask testing, 3123, 3127
autoset to a mask, 3128
clearing statistics counts, 3132
count statistics, 3125
creating a user mask (figure), 3126
definition of counts (statistics), 3132
editing description, 3125
flexible features of, 3123
stopping acquisition based on, 3129
supported standards, 3124
to create a mask, 3133
to edit a mask, 3130
why use, 3123
Masks
Fiberchannel standards supported, 3124
Gigabit Ethernet, 3124
SONET/SDH standards supported, 3124
Math waveform
defining (overview), 389
how to define, 393
how to use, 397
operations on, 395
display considerations, 396
source considerations, 396
take automatic measurements on, 398
take cursor measurements on, 399
Math Waveforms
how to create, 391
sources for, 391
Math waveforms, Glossary6
expression syntax for, 392
overview, 389
source dependencies of, 392
time base dependencies of, 392
usage limitations, 390, 395
why use, 390
Maximum measurement, B2
Mean measurement, B2
Measurement
+Overshoot, B2
Overshoot, B2
AC RMS, B1
Index5
Index
Amplitude, B1
Area, B2
Average Optical Power, B3
Burst Width, B5
Crossing %, B3
Cycle Area, B2
Cycle Mean, B1
Cycle RMS, B1
Delay, B5
Duty Cycle Distortion, B3
Extinction Ratio, B3
Extinction Ratio (%), B3
Extinction Ratio (DB), B3
Eye Height, B3
Eye Width, B3
Fall Time, B5
Frequency, B5
Gain, B1
Gated, Glossary4
High, B1, Glossary5
Jitter Pk-Pk, B3
Jitter RMS, B3
Low, B2, Glossary6
Maximum, B2
Mean, B2
Mid, B1
Minimum, B2
Negative Crossing, B5
Negative Duty Cycle, B5
Negative Width, B5
Noise Pk-Pk, B4
Noise RMS, B4
Peak to Peak, B2
Period, B5
Phase, B5
Positive Crossing, B5
Positive Duty Cycle, B5
Positive Width, B5
Quality Factor, B4
Rise Time, B5
RMS, B2
S/N Ratio, B4
Measurement accuracy, optimizing, 383388
Measurement level
HighRef, Glossary5
LowRef, Glossary6
MidRef, Glossary7
MidRef2, Glossary7
Measurements
amplitude category, B1
area category, B2
Index6
automatic, 366
annotations, 366
databases as sources, 367
eye pattern and optical, 367
independent characterization of, 367
list of supported, B1
statistics on, 367
whats measured, 366
why use, 366
cursor, 377
sources, 378
whats measured, 377
why use, 377
cursor types, 378
cursors and the display, 378
eye pattern/optical category, B3
High and Low levels defined, B6
how to localize (gates), 375
how to set sources for cursor, 382
how to take, 372
how to take cursor, 381
levels used in taking, B6, B7
reference levels defined, B6
reference levels defined (eye pattern/optical), B7
tools for taking, 365
Measurements bar, 26
Measuring Waveforms, 365
Menu, Pop-up, Glossary7
Menu bar, 26
Metastability reject triggering, 342
Mid measurement, B1
MidRef, measurement level, Glossary7
MidRef2, measurement level, Glossary7
Minimum measurement, B2
Mode, trigger, 339
Models, instrument, 11
Modes, sampling, 327329
Modules, sampling, supported, 13
Mouse, operations equivalent with touchscreen, 353
N
Negative Crossing measurement, B5
Negative Duty Cycle measurement, B5
Negative Overshoot measurement, B2
Negative Width measurement, B5
Noise Pk-Pk measurement, B4
Noise RMS measurement, B4
Normal
display mode, 360
Index
trigger mode, 339
O
Offset, vertical, 313
On/Standby button, 112, 114
Online, documentation, 21
Online Help, 21, 22
accessing, 3145
how to use, 3146
types available, 3145
Online help
displaying control descriptions, 3146
displaying overviews, 3147
for Windows 98, 3151
full-text search, 3150
keys to using, 3145
set up procedures, 3149
using the finder, 3148
why use, 3145
Operating system, reinstall, 116
Operation limitations
automatic measurements, 367
math waveforms, 390, 395
Operational limitations
Histograms, 3135
Mask testing, 3124
preview mode, 349
save and recall of setups, 3102
save and recall of waveforms, 3108
vertical offset, 35
waveform databases, 3139
Optical modules
incoming inspection, 126
installation, 18
Optical sampling modules, specifications, where to
find, A1
Optional accessories list, 136
Options, list, 135
Overshoot () measurement, B2
P
Package, shipping, contents of, 15
Peak-to-Peak measurement, B2
Period measurement, B5
Peripherals, connection of, 111
Persistence
infinite, 360
variable, 360
Phase measurement, B5
Phone number, Tektronix, xv
Pixel, Glossary7
Pop-up menu, Glossary7
Position
considerations for setting, 36
horizontal, 37
vertical, 36
Positive Crossing measurement, B5
Positive Duty Cycle measurement, B5
Positive Overshoot measurement, B2
Positive Width measurement, B5
Power, applying & removing, 112, 114
Preview mode, 349
Printing
information missing in print out, 3120
waveforms, 3120
Probe, used on Trigger Direct input, 341
Probechannel deskew, Glossary2
Probes, Definition, Glossary7
Procedure
back up user files, 115
Check the Package Contents, 15
create emergency startup disk, 114
diagnostics, 120
first-time power on, 112
functional tests, 123
hardware tests, 132
incoming inspection, 119
operating system reinstall, 116
operating system tests, 132
running QAPlus/Win, 133
To Autoset, 311
To Clear References, 3115
To Compensate the Instrument and Modules, 384
To Create a New Mask, 3133
To customize the database display, 3143
To Customize the Graticule & Waveforms, 362
To Define a Math Waveform, 393
To Deskew Channels, 386
To Display Waveform in a MagView, 357
To Display Waveform in the Main View, 355
To Edit a Mask, 3130
To Localize a Measurement, 375
To Mask Test a Waveform, 3127
To Perform Dark-Level and User Wavelength Gain
Compensations, 387
To Recall Your Setup, 3106
To Recall Your Waveform, 3112
To Reset the Instrument, 312
To Save Your Setup, 3103
To Save Your Waveform, 3109
To Set Acquisition Modes, 323
To Set Display Styles, 361
Index7
Index
To Set the Cursor Sources, 382

To set up a waveform database, 3141
To Acquire in FrameScan mode, 332
To Catch a Bit Error, 335
To Set Up the Signal Input, 38
To Start & Stop Acquisition, 325
To Take a Histogram, 3136
To Take Automatic Measurements, 372, 381
To trigger, 345
To Use an Exported Waveform, 3117
To Use Math Waveforms, 397
To use online help, 3146
Windows 98 reinstall, 116
Procedures, in the online help, 3149
Product
accessories list, 135
description, 11
functional model, 23
installation, 17
options list, 135
software, 13
Product support, contact information, xv
Programmer guide, 22
Propagation delay, deskew, 386
Q
QAPlus/Win application, 132
Quality Factor measurement, B4
Quantizing, Glossary7
R
Range, vertical input, 313
Readout display, 26
Readouts, 26
Readouts bar, 26
Real-time sampling, Glossary7
Recalling a setup, 3101
Recalling a waveform, 3108
Record
acquisition, shared by all channels, 319
length, defined, 327
Record length, Glossary7
Reference levels, methods for setting, 370
Reference memory, Glossary7
Reference waveforms, Glossary8
how to clear, 3115
Related Manuals, xiii
Release notes, software, 115
Remote communication, 3121
Index8
Reset
How to execute, 312
of instrument, 312
Rise Time measurement, B5
RMS measurement, B2
S
S/N Ratio measurement, B4
Sample acquisition mode, Glossary8
Sample interval, Glossary8
defined, 327
Sampling, Glossary8
modes, 327329
process, defined, 326328
process, illustrated, 327328
sequential equivalent-time, Glossary8
Sampling modules
cautionavoid damage, 36
installation, 18
installation compartments, 110
external attenuators with, 36
preventing overvoltage, 36
keys to using, 35
selection, 35
signal connection, 35
specifications, where to find, A1
static concerns, 18
supported, 13
where to insert user manuals, C1
Save and recall of setups
adding a comment, 3105
Save and recall of waveforms
adding a comment, 3111
Save Mode, if Windows starts in, 117
Saved waveform, saved, Glossary8
Saving a setup, 3101
Saving a waveform, 3108
Saving and recalling setups
including comments, 3102
virtual keyboard with, 3102
why use, 3101
Saving and recalling waveforms
including comments, 3108
why use, 3108
Scale, considerations for setting, 36
SELECT button, Glossary8
Selected cursor, Glossary1
Index
Selected waveform, Glossary8

defined, 37
Service support, contact information, xv
Setup
recalling, 3101
saving, 3101
Setups
how to recall, 3106
how to save, 3103
including comments with, 3102
purpose of saving/recalling, 3101
Shipping package, contents of, 15
Signal, connection and scaling overview, 34
Signal conditioning, background, 312
Sin(x)/x interpolation, 360, Glossary6
Slope, Glossary8
trigger, 338
Software
description, 115
diagnostic (QAPlus/Win), 132, 133
emergency startup disk, 114
installation, 115
release notes, 115
System Rebuild CD, 13
User Interface application, 13
Windows 98, 13
SONET/SDH, standards supported, 3124
Sources, trigger, 339
Specifications
conditions for meeting, A1
cooling, A7
data storage, A8
display, A7
environmental, A6
for instrument, A1
for sampling modules, where to find, A1
mechanical, A8
ports, A7
power consumption, A7
signal acquisition, A1
time base, A2
trigger, A3
specifications, A1
Standard, masks supported, 3124
Standard accessories, 135
Statistics, for histograms, 3138
Status bar, 26
System, diagnostics, 117
System Rebuild CD, 13
T
TDS8000, description, 11
Technical support, contact information, xv
Tektronix
contacting, xv
toll-free number, xv
Temperature compensation, 383388
Test equipment, for incoming inspection, 119
Testing Waveforms, masks, histograms, and waveform
databases, 3123
Time base, Glossary8
view, Glossary9
Tool bar, 26
Touch screen, inoperable in Windows Safe mode, 117
Touchscreen, operations equivalent with mouse, 353
Trigger, Glossary8
clock recovery source, 339
DIRECT connector, 339, 341
Edge, Glossary4
inputs, 340
Level, Glossary9
level, 338
modes, 339
PRESCALE connector, 339, 341
probe used to connect, 341
slope, 338
sources, 339
vs. untriggered displays (illustrated), 339
Trigger inputs, usage limitations, 341
Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob, 338
Trigger point, defined, 327
Trigger source, usage limitations, 341
Triggering, 337, 3923100
based on application, 340
edge, 338346
high frequency, 342
holdoff, 342
how to set, 345
keys to using, 337
metastability reject, 342
overview (of process), 337
overview of, 337
purpose, 337
why use, 337
U
Update, software, 13
Index9
Index
Upgrade, firmware, 13
URL, Tektronix, xv
Usable holdoff, 343
User Interface
Controls bar, 26
map, 26
Measurements bar, 26
Menu bar, 26
Readouts bar, 26
readouts display, 26
Status bar, 26
Tool bar, 26
Waveform bar, 26
User Interface application, software, 13
User manual
main, 22
sampling modules, 22
User Wavelength compensation, how to perform, 387
V
Variable Persistence, display mode, 360
Vectors, 360
Vectors, Display menu, 360
Verification, incoming inspection procedure, 119
Vertical
Bar cursors, Glossary9
position, 36
range (acquisition window), Glossary9
scaling, 34
set up procedure, 38
signal connection, 34
Vertical acquisition window, Glossary9
control set up, 39
overview, 313
Vertical deskew, Glossary2
Vertical offset
discussion of , 313
illustrated, 314
Vertical position, illustrated, 314
Vertical range, what determines, 313
Vertical scale and offset, why use, 34
Vertical set up, purpose, 34
View
graticule, 351
Main & Mag, 29
operations on selected, 351
that magnify, 353
time base, Glossary9
using multiple, 351
Views, multiple, 349
Index10
Virtual keyboard, Glossary9

dialog box, 3102, 3108
Virtual keypad, Glossary9
W
Waveform
Acquiring of, 33
channel, Glossary3
cursors, Glossary9
database, Glossary10
databases, using, 3139
defined, Glossary9
display, 26
overview of, 347
displayed fit to screen, 352
displaying, 347
exporting, 3116
how to display in a Mag View, 357
how to display in Main View, 355
how to recall, 3112
how to save, 3109
how to use an exported, 3117
printing, 3120
purpose of databases, 3139
recalling, 3108
saved, Glossary8
saving, 3108
selected, 37, Glossary8
Waveform display
elements of, 348
customizing, 358
why use, 358
Waveform bar, 26
Waveform databases
behavior with automatic measurements, 368
dimensions of, 3140
display, 3140
special features, 3139
To customize display of, 3143
to set up, 3141
two database limit, 3139
vs. vector view (figure), 3142
why use, 3139
with intensity display (figure), 3144
Waveform Display
defining waveforms for, 350
keys to using, 350
Waveform record, 327
definition applied to all channels, 319
illustrated, 328
Index
Waveforms
control operation vs. selected, 351
creating math, 389
defining and displaying, 350
histograms on, 3134
including comments with, 3108
live, Glossary6
mask testing, 3123
math, Glossary6
why use, 390
measuring, 365
operations on all views, 352
operations on selected, 350
purpose of mask testing, 3123
purpose of saving/recalling, 3108
purpose of taking histograms of, 3134
Reference, Glossary8
testing and statistical tools, 3123

Web site address, Tektronix, xv
WfmDB, Glossary10
Window
horizontal acquisition, Glossary5
vertical acquisition, Glossary9
Windows, Safe mode, 117
Windows 98, 13, Glossary10
reinstall, 116
Y
YT format, Glossary10
Z
Zoom, fast access to, 349
Index11
Index
Index12

TekTronix CSA8000 Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TekTronix CSA8000 Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TekTronix CSA8000 Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer

This document applies to firmware version 1.00

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Check the Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Check the Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Functional Model Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Process Overview Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Interface Map Complete Control and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signal Connection and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Acquisition Control Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Operations on the Selected Time Base View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Taking Automatic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Optimizing Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating Math Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defining Math Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Saving and Recalling Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Using Masks, Histograms, and Waveform Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mask Testing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessing Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Appendix B: Automatic Measurements Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C: Insert Sampling Module User Manuals Here . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Table 11: Additional accessory connection information . . . . . . . . . .

Table 31: Application-based triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A1: System Signal acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B1: Supported amplitude measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Figure 317: Horizontal position includes time to

Figure B1: Levels used to determine measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

General Safety Summary

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

General Safety Summary

Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manuals installation instructions for

Symbols and Terms

Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in

Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:

This product may be rackmounted by using the appropriate Tektronix rackmount

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

Explains how to operate the instrument: how to control acquisition of,

Lists the specifications and accessories of the instrument

About This Manual

Reference comprises an encyclopedia of topics (see Overview on page 31)

Appendices provides additional information including the specifications and

Related Manuals and Online Documents

CSA8000 & TDS8000 User Manual

CSA8000 & TDS8000 Online Help